Dell Networking Command Line Reference Guide for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch I/O Module 9.5(0.
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
Contents 1 About this Guide..................................................................................................... 48 Objectives............................................................................................................................................48 Audience..............................................................................................................................................49 Conventions...............................................................
asset-tag.............................................................................................................................................. 78 asf-mode............................................................................................................................................. 78 banner exec......................................................................................................................................... 79 banner login........................................
show memory................................................................................................................................... 107 show processes cpu..........................................................................................................................107 show processes ipc flow-control......................................................................................................111 show processes memory...............................................................
show config.......................................................................................................................................142 Common IP ACL Commands........................................................................................................... 142 access-class...................................................................................................................................... 143 clear counters ip access-group...............................................
permit................................................................................................................................................ 196 seq......................................................................................................................................................197 show config.......................................................................................................................................198 show ip prefix-list detail........................
seq ether-type.................................................................................................................................. 260 seq..................................................................................................................................................... 263 seq..................................................................................................................................................... 265 permit udp.......................................
BGPv4 Commands............................................................................................................................310 address-family...................................................................................................................................310 aggregate-address.............................................................................................................................311 bgp add-path...............................................................
neighbor activate.............................................................................................................................. 337 neighbor add-path............................................................................................................................338 neighbor advertisement-interval......................................................................................................339 neighbor advertisement-start......................................................
show ip bgp inconsistent-as.............................................................................................................375 show ip bgp neighbors..................................................................................................................... 376 show ip bgp next-hop.......................................................................................................................381 show ip bgp paths.....................................................................
show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping.............................................................................................. 412 show mac protocol-queue-mapping.............................................................................................. 412 12 Data Center Bridging (DCB)............................................................................. 414 advertise dcbx-appln-tlv...................................................................................................................
show qos dcb-output....................................................................................................................... 451 show qos priority-groups................................................................................................................. 452 show stack-unit stack-ports ets details........................................................................................... 452 dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size..................................................................
domain-name...................................................................................................................................486 excluded-address............................................................................................................................. 487 hardware-address.............................................................................................................................487 host.......................................................................
ip ecmp-group................................................................................................................................. 508 link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold......................................................................................508 link-bundle-monitor enable............................................................................................................ 509 show config...................................................................................
debug gvrp........................................................................................................................................ 536 disable................................................................................................................................................537 garp timers........................................................................................................................................ 538 gvrp enable...........................................
interface range macro (define).........................................................................................................567 interface range macro name............................................................................................................568 interface vlan.....................................................................................................................................569 intf-type cr4 autoneg...............................................................
22 IPv4 Routing........................................................................................................ 613 arp...................................................................................................................................................... 613 arp learn-enable................................................................................................................................614 arp retries.......................................................................
show ip route....................................................................................................................................646 show ip route list.............................................................................................................................. 649 show ip route summary................................................................................................................... 650 show ip traffic..........................................................
ipv6 unicast-routing......................................................................................................................... 683 show ipv6 cam stack-unit................................................................................................................ 683 show ipv6 control-plane icmp.........................................................................................................684 show ipv6 fib stack-unit................................................................
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft............................................................................................................ 713 debug ip bgp......................................................................................................................................713 debug ip bgp events..........................................................................................................................714 debug ip bgp ipv6 dampening...............................................
redistribute ospf................................................................................................................................ 742 router bgp..........................................................................................................................................743 show capture bgp-pdu neighbor.....................................................................................................744 show config.................................................................
neighbor remove-private-as............................................................................................................ 770 neighbor route-map..........................................................................................................................771 neighbor route-reflector-client........................................................................................................772 network...................................................................................
debug isis spf-triggers...................................................................................................................... 798 debug isis update-packets............................................................................................................... 798 default-information originate...........................................................................................................799 description..........................................................................
redistribute........................................................................................................................................ 824 redistribute bgp.................................................................................................................................825 redistribute ospf................................................................................................................................ 827 router isis.................................................
default-vlan disable.......................................................................................................................... 858 name................................................................................................................................................. 858 show config...................................................................................................................................... 859 show vlan....................................................
clear ip msdp sa-cache.................................................................................................................... 887 clear ip msdp statistic.......................................................................................................................888 debug ip msdp..................................................................................................................................888 ip msdp cache-rejected-sa...................................................
ip multicast-limit............................................................................................................................... 914 ip multicast-routing.......................................................................................................................... 914 show ip mroute................................................................................................................................. 915 show ip rpf........................................................
ip ospf mtu-ignore............................................................................................................................942 ip ospf network................................................................................................................................. 942 ip ospf priority................................................................................................................................... 943 ip ospf retransmit-interval......................................
debug ipv6 ospf bfd..........................................................................................................................984 debug ipv6 ospf................................................................................................................................ 986 default-information originate.......................................................................................................... 986 graceful-restart grace-period..................................................
ip pim dr-priority............................................................................................................................. 1016 ip pim join-filter............................................................................................................................... 1017 ip pim ingress-interface-map......................................................................................................... 1017 ip pim neighbor-filter...................................................
flow-based enable..........................................................................................................................1045 monitor session.............................................................................................................................. 1045 show config.................................................................................................................................... 1046 show monitor session....................................................
Policy-Based QoS Commands.......................................................................................................1078 bandwidth-percentage...................................................................................................................1078 class-map........................................................................................................................................1079 clear qos statistics.....................................................................
show qos dscp-color-policy ..........................................................................................................1110 show qos dscp-color-map ............................................................................................................ 1112 44 Routing Information Protocol (RIP).............................................................1113 auto-summary........................................................................................................................
show rmon history.......................................................................................................................... 1138 show rmon log................................................................................................................................ 1139 show rmon statistics....................................................................................................................... 1139 46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)....................................
password..........................................................................................................................................1167 password-attributes........................................................................................................................ 1168 service password-encryption......................................................................................................... 1169 show privilege................................................................
show users.......................................................................................................................................1196 show userroles ................................................................................................................................1197 ssh.................................................................................................................................................... 1198 Secure DHCP Commands.....................................
show snmp group........................................................................................................................... 1221 show snmp user.............................................................................................................................. 1222 snmp ifmib ifalias long.................................................................................................................... 1222 snmp-server community........................................................
redundancy force-failover stack-unit............................................................................................ 1254 reset stack-unit............................................................................................................................... 1254 show redundancy............................................................................................................................1255 show system stack-ports..............................................................
clock update-calendar................................................................................................................... 1284 debug ntp........................................................................................................................................1284 ntp authenticate..............................................................................................................................1285 ntp authentication-key...................................................
reload.............................................................................................................................................. 1306 show boot blc................................................................................................................................. 1306 show boot selection....................................................................................................................... 1307 show bootflash....................................................
peer-link port-channel....................................................................................................................1331 peer-routing.................................................................................................................................... 1332 peer-routing-timeout..................................................................................................................... 1332 primary-priority............................................................
61 ICMP Message Types........................................................................................1361 62 SNMP Traps....................................................................................................... 1363 63 FC Flex IO Modules..........................................................................................1368 FC Flex IO Modules.........................................................................................................................
show stack-unit stack-ports pfc details................................................................................... 1401 Fibre Channel over Ethernet for FC Flex IO Modules................................................................... 1402 NPIV Proxy Gateway for FC Flex IO Modules................................................................................ 1402 dcb-map...............................................................................................................................
pfc priority................................................................................................................................. 1435 priority-group............................................................................................................................1436 priority-group qos-policy......................................................................................................... 1437 priority-list.........................................................................
mtu............................................................................................................................................. 1471 negotiation auto........................................................................................................................ 1472 portmode hybrid....................................................................................................................... 1474 stack-unit portmode.............................................................
service-policy output................................................................................................................1506 service-queue........................................................................................................................... 1506 show qos qos-policy-output....................................................................................................1507 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT)..........................................................................
1 About this Guide This book provides information about the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features found in the Dell OS and on the Dell Networking systems supported by the Dell OS.
Audience This book is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring or maintaining networks. This guide assumes that you are knowledgeable in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking technologies. Conventions This book uses the following conventions to describe command syntax. Keyword Keywords are in Courier font and must be entered in the CLI as listed. parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the CLI.
CLI Basics 2 This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols. Accessing the Command Line When the system boots successfully, you are positioned on the command line in EXEC mode and not prompted to log in. You can access the commands through a serial console port or a Telnet session.
When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, the Dell Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2. Navigating the CLI The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) displays a command line interface (CLI) prompt comprised of the host name and CLI mode. • Host name is the initial part of the prompt and is “Dell” by default. You can change the host name with the hostname command.
To obtain a list of keywords with a brief functional description: Type help at the prompt. To obtain a list of available options: Type a keyword and then type a space and a ?. To obtain a list of partial keywords using a partial keyword: Type a partial keyword and then type a ?.
Key Combination Action CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of the command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word. Esc D Deletes all the characters from the cursor to the end of the word. Using the Keyword no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands.
find searches for the first occurrence of a pattern grep displays text that matches a pattern. no-more does not paginate the display output save copies the output to a file for future use The grep command option has an ignore-case sub-option that makes the search case-insensitive. For example, the commands: Displaying All Output To display the output all at once (not one screen at a time), use the no-more option after the pipe.
CONFIGURATION Mode In EXEC Privilege mode, use the configure command to enter CONFIGURATION mode and configure routing protocols and access interfaces. To enter CONFIGURATION mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to EXEC Privilege mode. 2. Enter the configure command. The prompt changes to include (conf). From this mode, you can enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface command. INTERFACE Mode Use INTERFACE mode to configure interfaces or IP services on those interfaces.
To enter IP ACCESS LIST mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended command. Include a name for the ACL. The prompt changes to include (conf-std-nacl) or (conf-ext-nacl). You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. LINE Mode To configure the console or virtual terminal parameters, use LINE mode. To enter LINE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the line command.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree pvst command. The prompt changes to include (confpvst). You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. PREFIX-LIST Mode To configure a prefix list, use PREFIX-LIST mode. To enter PREFIX-LIST mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the ip prefix-list command. Include a name for the prefix list. The prompt changes to include (conf-nprefixl). You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
To enter ROUTER OSPF mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the router ospf {process-id} command. The prompt changes to include (confrouter_ospf-id). You can switch to INTERFACE mode by using the interface command or you can switch to ROUTER RIP mode by using the router rip command. ROUTER RIP Mode To enable and configure Router Information Protocol (RIP), use ROUTER RIP mode. For more information, refer to Routing Information Protocol (RIP). To enter ROUTER RIP mode: 1.
3 File Management This chapter contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files as well as other file management commands. The commands in this chapter are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). cd Change to a different working directory.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information To copy the running configuration Enter the keywords running-config. To copy the startup configuration Enter the keywords startup-config. To copy a file on the external FLASH Enter the keyword slot0:// then the filename. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The Dell Networking OS supports a maximum of 100 files at the root directory level, on both the internal and external Flash.
second position indicates that the target is the internal Flash. The source is on a secure server running SSH, so you are prompted for the user datagram protocol (UDP) port of the SSH server on the remote host. Example Dell#copy scp: flash: Address or name of remote host []: 10.11.199.134 Port number of the server [22]: 99 Source file name []: test.cfg User name to login remote host: admin Password to login remote host: Destination file name [test.cfg]: test1.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#dir Directory of flash: 1 drwx 4096 Jan 01 2 drwx 2048 Mar 06 3 drwx 4096 Feb 25 4 drwx 4096 Feb 25 5 d--- 4096 Feb 25 6 -rwx 720969768 Mar 05 7 -rwx 4260 Mar 03 8 -rwx 31969685 Mar 05 DellS-XL-8-3-16-148.
show file-systems — displays information about the file systems on the system. HTTP Copy via CLI Copy one file to another location. Dell Networking OS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field). This feature is supported on S6000 Z9000 S4810 S4820T platform. Syntax copy http://10.16.206.77/sample_file flash://sample_filecopy flash://sample_file http://10.16.206.77/sample_file You can copy from the server to the switch and vice-versa.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The kernel coredump can be large and may take five to 30 minutes to upload. The Dell Networking OS does not overwrite application coredumps so you should delete them as necessary to conserve space on the flash; if the flash is out of memory, the coredump is aborted. If the FTP server is not reachable, the application coredump is aborted.
NOTE: You must disable logging coredump before you designate a new server destination for your core dumps. Related Commands logging coredump – disables the kernel coredump pwd Display the current working directory. Syntax pwd Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#pwd flash: Dell# Related Commands cd – changes the directory. rename Rename a file in the local file system.
show boot system Displays information about boot images currently configured on the system. Syntax Parameters show boot system stack-unit {0-5 | all} 0–5 Enter this information to display the boot image information of only the entered stack-unit. all Enter the keyword all to display the boot image information of all the stack-units in the stack. Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show file flash://startup-config ! Version E8-3-16-29 ! Last configuration change at Thu Apr 26 19:19:02 2012 by default ! Startup-config last updated at Thu Apr 26 19:19:04 2012 by default ! boot system stack-unit 0 primary system: A: boot system stack-unit 0 secondary tftp://10.11.200.241/dtm1000e-5-c2 boot system gateway 10.11.209.
Dell# Command Fields - - network rw scp: Field Description size(b) Lists the size (in bytes) of the storage location. If the location is remote, no size is listed. Free(b) Lists the available size (in bytes) of the storage location. If the location is remote, no size is listed. Feature Displays the formatted DOS version of the device. Type Displays the type of storage. If the location is remote, the word network is listed. Flags Displays the access available to the storage location.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. NOTE: A filepath that contains a dot ( . ) is not supported.
arp for the current static ARP configuration boot for the current boot configuration class-map for the current class-map configuration fefd for the current FEFD configuration ftp for the current FTP configuration fvrp for the current FVRP configuration host for the current host configuration hardwaremonitor for hardware-monitor action-on-error settings igmp for the current IGMP configuration interface for the current interface configuration line for the current line configuration l
Command Modes Command History Example File Management route-map for the current route map configuration snmp for the current SNMP configuration spanningtree for the current spanning tree configuration static for the current static route configuration status for the file status information tacacs+ for the current TACACS+ configuration tftp for the current TFTP configuration users for the current users configuration wred-profile for the current wred-profile configuration configured (OPTIO
! ... Example Dell#show running-config status running-config bytes 4306, checksum 0x4D55EE70 startup-config bytes 4344, checksum 0x6472C5E Dell# Usage Information The status option allows you to display the size and checksum of the running configuration and the startup configuration. show startup-config Display the startup configuration. Syntax show startup-config Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show version Display the current Dell Networking OS version information on the system. Syntax show version Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show version Dell Force10 Real Time Operating System Software Dell Force10 Operating System Version: 1.0 Dell Force10 Application Software Version: E8-3-16-29 Copyright (c) 1999-2012 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Lines Beginning With Description Chassis Type: Chassis type (for example, E1200, E600, E600i, E300, C300, C150, S25, S50, S55, S60, S4810) Control Processor:... Control processor information and amount of memory on processor 128K bytes... Amount and type of memory on system 1 34 Port Hardware configuration of the system, including the number and type of physical interfaces available upgrade boot Upgrade the bootflash image or bootselector image.
usbflash: After entering the keyword usbflash:, you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form: // filepath or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. A: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition A. B: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition B. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
flash After entering the keyword flash you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form://filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. usbflash After entering the keyword usbflash you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form:// filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. A: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition A. B: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition B.
flash:// (Optional). Enter the flash:// keyword. The default is to use the flash drive. You can just enter the image file name. img-file Enter the name the Dell Networking software image file to validate. hash-value (Optional). Enter the relevant hash published on i-Support. Defaults flash drive Command Modes EXEC mode Command History Version 9.5.(0.
4 Control and Monitoring This chapter describes control and monitoring for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. asset-tag Assign and store a unique asset-tag to the stack member. Syntax asset-tag stack-unit unit id Asset-tag ID To remove the asset tag, use no stack-unit unit-id Asset-tag ID command. Parameters stack-unit unitid Enter the keywordsstack-unit then the unit-id to assign a tag to the specific member. The range is from 0 to 5.
Parameters unit-id Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. The range is from 0 to 5 or all. queue size Enter the queue size of the stack member. The range is from 0 to 5. Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You must save the configuration and reload the system to implement ASF.
4d21h5m: %STKUNIT0-M P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line console This is the banner Dell Force10 con0 now available Press RETURN to get started. This is the banner Related Commands banner login — sets a banner for login connections to the system. banner motd — sets a Message of the Day banner. exec-banner — Enables the display of a text string when you enter EXEC mode. line — enables and configures the console and virtual terminal lines to the system.
'c' is a delimiting character Dell(conf)#no banner login ? keyboard-interactive Prompt will be displayed by default Dell(conf)#banner login keyboard-interactive Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'. This is the banner% Dell(conf)#end Dell#exit 13d21h9m: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user on line console This is the banner Dell Force10 con0 now available Press RETURN to get started.
Related Commands banner exec — enables the display of a text string when you enter EXEC mode. banner login — sets a banner to display after successful login to the system. clear alarms Clear alarms on the system. Syntax clear alarms Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command clears alarms that are no longer active. If an alarm situation is still active, it is seen in the system output.
vty number Command Modes Command History Enter the keyword vty then a number to clear a terminal line. The range is from 0 to 9. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. configure Enter CONFIGURATION mode from EXEC Privilege mode. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example configure [terminal] terminal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the terminal. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
The following message is an indication that collection of CPU traffic is automatically turned on. To view the traffic statistics, use the show cputraffic-stats command. If the CPU receives excessive traffic, traffic is rate controlled. NOTE: You must enable this command before the show cpu-trafficstats command displays traffic statistics. Dell Networking OS recommends disabling debugging (no debug cpu-traffic-stats) after troubleshooting is complete.
do Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without returning to the EXEC level. Syntax Parameters do command command Enter an EXEC-level command. Defaults none Command Modes • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Users entering EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level.
end Return to EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, CONFIGURATION or ROUTER OSPF modes). Syntax end Command Modes • CONFIGURATION • SPANNING TREE • MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE • LINE • INTERFACE • VRRP • ACCESS-LIST • PREFIX-LIST • ROUTER OSPF • ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. exit — returns to the lower command mode.
exec-timeout Set a time interval that the system waits for input on a line before disconnecting the session. Syntax exec-timeout minutes [seconds] To return to default settings, use the no exec-timeout command. Parameters minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current session. The range is from 0 to 35791. The default is 10 minutes for the console line and 30 minutes for the VTY line. seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of seconds.
• Command History Related Commands ROUTER RIP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode. ftp-server enable Enable FTP server functions on the system. Syntax ftp-server enable Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111 Connected to 10.31.1.111. 220 FTOS (1.0) FTP server ready Name (10.31.1.
ftp-server topdir Specify the top-level directory to be accessed when an incoming FTP connection request is made. Syntax Parameters ftp-server topdir directory directory Enter the directory path. Defaults The internal flash is the default directory. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. hostname Set the host name of the system. Syntax Parameters hostname name name Defaults Dell Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long. Version 9.3(0.0) Modified the default hostname as Dell. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The hostname is used in the prompt.
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The password is listed in the configuration file; you can view the password by entering the show running-config ftp command in EXEC mode. Use the ip ftp password command when you use the ftp: parameter in the copy command. Related Commands copy — copy files. ftp-server username — sets the user name for the FTP sessions.
ip ftp username Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests. Syntax Parameters ip ftp username username username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long. Defaults No user name is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Configure a password with the ip ftp password command. Related Commands ip ftp password — sets the password for FTP connections.
• For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For a Port Channel, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Command History Verison 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system. This command accesses LINE mode, where you can set the access conditions for the designated line. Syntax Parameters line {console 0 | vty number [end-number]} console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to configure the console port. The console option is <0-0>.
ping Test connectivity between the system and another device by sending echo requests and waiting for replies.
validate-reply (IPv4 only) Enter Y or N for reply validation. • N: Do not validate reply data. • Y: Do validate reply data. Default is No. pattern pattern (IPv4 only) Enter the IPv4 data pattern. Range: 0-FFFF. Default: 0xABCD. sweep-minsize Enter the minimum size of datagram in sweep range. The range is from 52 to 15359 bytes. sweep-maxsize Enter the maximum size of datagram in sweep range. The range is from 53 to 15359 bytes. sweep-interval Enter the incremental value for sweep size.
Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.209 0 ms Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.66 0 ms Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.87 0 ms Dell# Example (IPv6) Dell#ping 100::1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 100::1, timeout is 2 seconds: !!!!! Success rate is 100.0 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 (ms) Dell# reload Reboot the Dell Networking OS. Syntax reload Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Messages can contain an unlimited number of lines; however, each line is limited to 255 characters. To move to the next line, use . To send the message use CTR-Z; to abort a message, use CTR-C. service timestamps To debug and log messages, add time stamps. This command adds either the uptime or the current time and date.
To view the current options set for the service timestamps command, use the show running-config command. show alarms View alarms. Syntax show alarms Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
[4/20 10:27:23]: CMD-(CLI):[configure terminal]by default from console - Repeated 1 time. [4/20 10:27:23]: CMD-(CLI):[snmp-server community public ro]by default from console [4/20 10:27:23]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 172.16.1.162]by default from console [4/20 10:27:23]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 10.10.10.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 10.1.2.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 172.31.1.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 133.33.33.
show command-tree Display the entire CLI command tree, and optionally, display the utilization count for each command and its options. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History show command-tree [count | no] count Display the command tree with a usage counter for each command. no Display all of the commands that may be preceded by the keyword no, which is the keyword used to remove a command from the running-configuration. none • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
conflict A.B.C.D server statistics snooping binding option option option option option option usage: usage: usage: usage: usage: usage: clear ip fib command usage:4 clear ip route Dell# command usage:1 0 0 0 0 0 0 show cpu-traffic-stats View the CPU traffic statistics. Syntax Parameters show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all] port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only. The range is from 1 to 1568.
Related Commands debug cpu-traffic-stats — enables CPU traffic statistics for debugging. show debugging View a list of all enabled debugging processes. Syntax show debugging Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information The following example shows the output of the show environment fan command as it appears prior to the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0.
Parameters media slot Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media then the stack ID of the stack member you want to display pluggable media inventory. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If there are no fiber ports in the unit, just the header under show inventory media displays. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, the output displays "Media not present or accessible".
show interfaces transceiver — displays the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number. show memory View current memory usage on the MXL switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show memory [stack-unit 0–5] stack-unit 0–5 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
As an option of the show processes cpu command, this option displays CPU usage for the designated stack member. Or, as an option of memory, this option limits the output of memory statistics to the designated stack member. Refer to Example (stack-unit). Command Modes Command History Example (summary) summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the CPU utilization of processes related to line card processing. ipc (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipc to display interprocess communication statistics.
0x760d5000 26384050 frrpagt 0x762da000 491370 F10StkMgr 0x762f9000 665580 lcMgr 0x7631d000 37580 dla 0x76348000 452110 sysAdmTsk 0x76367000 1751990 timerMgr 0x76385000 14460 PM 0x7629d000 347970 diagagt 0x763c7000 0 evagt 0x763eb000 90800 ipc 0x77ee9000 5 tme 0x77eec000 0 ttraceIpFlow 0x77eee000 20 linkscan_user_threa 0x77ff6000 0 isrTask 0x7811a000 0 tDDB 0x7811c000 22980 GC 0x7811e000 0 bshell_reaper_threa 0x78365000 10 tSysLog 0x78367000 1106980 tTimerTask 0x78369000 13131160 tExcTask 0x7836b000 30 tLogT
frrp f10appioserv xstp f10appioserv pim f10appioserv igmp f10appioserv mrtm f10appioserv l2mgr f10appioserv l2pm f10appioserv arpm Dell# 180224 225280 2740224 225280 1007616 225280 401408 225280 5496832 225280 1036288 225280 172032 225280 192512 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7512064 208896 9801728 208896 7757824 208896 7639040 208896 11124736 208896 16134144 208896 7483392 208896 7057408 Example (stack-unit) Dell#show process memory stack-unit 0 Total: 2147483648, MaxUsed
show processes memory — displays CPU usage information based on processes running. show processes ipc flow-control Display the single window protocol queue (SWPQ) statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes show processes ipc flow-control [cp] cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the control processor’s SWPQ statistics. none • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example • If no response is received within a defined period of time, the SWP timeout mechanism resubmits the message at the head of the FIFO queue. • After retrying a defined number of times, the SWP-2-NOMORETIMEOUT timeout message is generated. • In the example, a retry (Retries) value of zero indicates that the SWP mechanism reached the maximum number of retransmissions without an acknowledgement.
Usage Information show processes memory output Field Description Total: Total system memory available MaxUsed: Total maximum memory used ever (history indicated with time stamp) CurrentUsed: Total memory currently in use CurrentFree: Total system memory available SharedUsed: Total used shared memory SharedFree: Total free shared memory PID Process ID Process Process Name ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory Size Process test, stack, and data size Allocs Total dynamic
Example (managementunit) Dell#show processes memory management-unit Total : 2147483648, MaxUsed : 378470400 [05/23/2012 09:49:39] CurrentUsed: 378470400, CurrentFree: 1769013248 SharedUsed : 18533952, SharedFree : 2437592 PID Process Current 472 ospf 94952 529 fcoecntrl 71972 225 dhclient 0 0 360 ndpm 4848 160 vrrp 83700 508 frrp 104214 186 xstp 38422 374 pim 111860 --More-- ResSize Size Allocs Frees 8716288 573440 94952 0 7917568 262144 1310720 548864 0 7512064 618496 4848 0 4848 804864
stack-unit unitID Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack member number to display IFM information for that unit. The range is from 0 to 5. trace-flags Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace flags. Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
stack-unit unitid Command Modes Command History Example (brief) • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack member ID for information on that stack member. The range is 0 to 5. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Fabric Id : C2 Asset tag : test PSOC FW Rev : 0xb ICT Test Date : 0-0-0 ICT Test Info : 0x0 Max Power Req : 31488 Fabric Type : 0x3 Fabric Maj Ver : 0x1 Fabric Min Ver : 0x0 SW Manageability: 0x4 HW Manageability: 0x1 Max Boot Time : 6 minutes Link Tuning : unsupported Auto Reboot : enabled Burned In MAC : 00:01:e8:43:de:e1 No Of MACs :3 Related Commands asset-tag — Assigns and stores a unique asset-tag to the stack member. show version — Displays the Dell Networking OS version.
save Command Modes Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword save to save the command output. flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename [max 20 chars] ). EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Without the page or stack-unit option, the command output is continuous. Use Ctrl-z to interrupt the command output. The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of a show command.
Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save ? flash: Save to local file system (flash://filename (max 20 chars) ) Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | save flash://LauraSave Start saving show command report ....... Dell# Dell#dir Directory of flash: Directory of flash: 1 drwx 4096 2 drwx 2048 3 drwx 4096 4 drwx 4096 5 d--4096 6 -rwx 10303 7 -rwx 7366 8 -rwx 4 9 -rwx 12829 config.
ICMP statistics: Rcvd: 0 format errors, 0 checksum errors, 0 redirects, 2 unreachable 0 echo, 0 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request, 0 other Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp 0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem UDP statistics: Rcvd: 396516 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port 0 short packets, 0 bad length, 28746 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full Sent: 16460 tot
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History host Enter the name of device. ip-address Enter the IP address of the device in dotted decimal format. • Timeout = 5 seconds • Probe count = 3 • 30 hops max • 40 byte packet size • UDP port = 33434 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
undebug all Disable all debug operations on the system. Syntax undebug all Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. virtual-ip Configure a virtual IP address for the active management interface. You can configure virtual addresses both for IPv4 independently. Syntax Parameters virtual-ip {ipv4-address} ipv4-address Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
command is similar to the copy running-config startup-config command. terminal Command Modes Command History Usage Information 124 Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This command is similar to the show running-config command. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The write memory command saves the running-configuration to the file labeled startup-configuration.
5 802.1X An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell Networking operating software supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.
Parameters all Enable all 802.1X debug messages. auth-pae-fsm Enable authentication PAE FSM debug messages. backend-fsm Enable backend FSM debug messages. eapol-pdu Enable the EAPOL frame trace and related debug messages. interface interface Restricts the debugging information to an interface. Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands • dot1x port-control — Enables port control on an interface. • dot1x guest-vlan — Configures a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable. • show dot1x interface — Displays the 802.1X configuration of an interface. dot1x auth-server Configure the authentication server to RADIUS. Syntax dot1x auth-server radius Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands dot1x mac-auth-bypass — Enables MAC authentication bypass. dot1x authentication (Configuration) Enable dot1x globally. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on a globally, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 1X authentication is enabled when an interface is connected to the switch.
Defaults single-host Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • Single-host mode authenticates only one host per authenticator port and drops all other traffic on the port. • Multi-host mode authenticates the first host to respond to an Identity Request and then permits all other traffic on the port. • Multi-supplicant mode authenticates every device attempting to connect to the network on the authenticator port.
Defaults 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x max-supplicants Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in Multi-Auth mode. Syntax Parameters dot1x max-supplicants number number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in Multi-Auth mode. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Auto Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The authenticator completes authentication only when port-control is set to auto. dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x reauth-max Configure the maximum number of times a port can reauthenticate before the port becomes unauthorized. Syntax dot1x reauth-max number To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command. Parameters number Defaults 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the permitted number of reauthentications. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2.
value (in seconds) is based on the configured RADIUS-server timeout and retransmit values and calculated according to the following formula: dot1x server-timeout seconds > (radius-server retransmit seconds + 1) * radius-server timeout seconds. Where the default values are as follows: dot1x server-timeout (30 seconds), radius-server retransmit (3 seconds), and radius-server timeout (5 seconds). For example: Dell(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.105 timeout 6 Dell(conf)#radius-server host 10.11.197.
Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show dot1x cos-mapping interface Display the CoS priority-mapping table the RADIUS server provides and applies to authenticated supplicants on an 802.1X-enabled system.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Dell#show dot1x cos-mapping int g 2/21 mac-address 00:00:01:00:07:00 802.1p CoS re-map table on Gi 2/21: ---------------------------------802.1p CoS re-map table for Supplicant: 00:00:01:00:07:00 Dot1 Remapped Dot1p 0 7 1 6 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 2 6 1 7 0 show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface.
Usage Information If you enable 802.1X multi-supplicant authentication on a port, additional 802.1X configuration details (Port Authentication status, Untagged VLAN ID, Authentication PAE state, and Backend state) are displayed for each supplicant, as shown in the following example. Example Dell#show dot1x int Gi 2/32 802.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Dell# Example (Interface) Authenticated Idle Dell#show dot1x interface g 0/21 802.
Access Control Lists (ACL) 6 Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS).
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. remark Enter a description for an ACL entry. Syntax Parameters remark [remark-number] [description] remarknumber Enter the remark number. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. NOTE: You can use the same sequence number for the remark and an ACL rule. description Enter a description of up to 80 characters. Defaults Not configured.
resequence access-list Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list. Syntax Parameters resequence access-list {ipv4 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} ipv4 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4 or mac to identify the access list type to resequence. access-listname Enter the name of a configured IP access list. StartingSeqNu m Enter the starting sequence number to resequence. The range is from 0 to 4294967290.
Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you have exhausted all the sequence numbers, this feature permits reassigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing prefix list. Related Commands seq — Assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter. show config Display the current ACL configuration.
access-class Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line. Syntax Parameters access-class access-list-name access-listname Defaults Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear counters ip access-group Erase all counters maintained for access lists.
implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped). vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the ID numbers of the VLANs. Defaults Not enabled.. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
• in Command Modes Command History For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Identify whether ACL is applied on the ingress or egress side. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip accounting access-list Display the IP access-lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters.
Example show ip accounting access-lists Field Description “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry. Dell#show ip accounting access FILTER1 interface gig 1/6 Extended IP access list FILTER1 seq 5 deny ip any 191.1.0.0 /16 count (0x00 packets) seq 10 deny ip any 191.2.0.
Defaults host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
Usage Information The Dell operating system supports one ingress and one egress IP ACL per interface. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specifications on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. Example Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard TestList Dell(config-std-nacl)# Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended access list. resequence access-list — Displays the current configuration.
Defaults order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
• If sequence-number is configured, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
deny (for Extended IP ACLs) Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria. Syntax deny {ip | ip-protocol-number} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [monitor] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 154 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
Defaults threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
Related Commands deny tcp — assigns a filter to deny TCP packets. deny udp — assigns a filter to deny UDP packets. ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. deny icmp To drop all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enablecommand in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
operator port port • fin: finish (no more data from the user) • psh: push function • rst: reset the connection • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand.
Defaults threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 162 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). Defaults fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword then a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs are terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
Usage Information The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. Example Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended TESTListEXTEND Dell(config-ext-nacl)# Related Commands ip access-list standard — configures a standard IP access list. resequence access-list — Displays the current configuration. permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). Defaults fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port.
the message type. The range is 0 to 255 for ICMP type and 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority).
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt, or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets. permit udp To pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority).
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt, or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter.
operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operands: • • • • • port port eq = equal to neq = not equal to gt = greater than lt = less than range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter.) (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, the flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
To delete a MAC access-group, use the no mac access-group mac-listname command. Parameters access-listname Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs. The range is from 1 to 4094 (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). NOTE: This option is available only with the keywordin option. in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed. Syntax Parameters show mac access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in | out] access-listname Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
in | out Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet and then enter the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE and then enter the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN and then the vlan id Identify whether ACL is applied on ingress or egress side. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: For more information, also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List Commands sections. deny To drop packets with a the MAC address specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold—in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.
mac access-list standard To configure a standard MAC ACL, name a new or existing MAC access control list (MAC ACL) and enter MAC ACCESS LIST mode. Syntax Parameters mac access-list standard mac-list-name mac-list-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a text string as the name of the standard MAC access list (140 character maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Parameters Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} command. any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match).
When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses.
mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
Parameters any Enter the keyword any to drop all packets. host macaddress Enter the keyword host and then enter a MAC address to drop packets with that host address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
mac access-list extended Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL). Syntax Parameters mac access-list extended access-list-name [cpu-qos] access-listname Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters. cpu-qos Enter the keyword cpu-qos to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only (CoPP). Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
permit To pass packets matching the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax permit {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: • • Parameters Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. deny — configures a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. seq — configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. seq Configure a filter with a specific sequence number.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: • ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format. • llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format. • snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
Defaults Clears “hit” counters for all prefix lists unless a prefix list is specified. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip prefix-list — configures a prefix list. deny To drop packets meeting the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.
ip prefix-list Enter the PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History ip prefix-list prefix-name prefix-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long. CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Prefix lists redistribute OSPF and RIP routes meeting specific criteria.
If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. seq — configures a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number. seq To a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter, assign a sequence number.
Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to pass packets. show config Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes PREFIX-LIST Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-nprefixl)#show config ! ip prefix-list snickers Dell(conf-nprefixl)# show ip prefix-list detail Display details of the configured prefix lists.
seq 7 deny 200.200.2.0/24 (hit count: 1) seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 132) Dell# show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name] prefix-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
continue To a route-map entry with a higher sequence number, configure a route-map. Syntax Parameters continue [sequence-number] sequencenumber Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the route map sequence number. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is: no sequence number Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands set metric — Specifies a COMMUNITY attribute set automatic-tag — Configures a filter to modify the AS path description Add a description to this route map. Syntax Parameters description description description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a description to identify the route map (80 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. route-map — Enables a route map.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers. match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric.
match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag. match ip next-hop To match based on the next-hop IP addresses specified in an IP access list or IP prefix list, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match ip next-hop {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name} access-listname Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters. prefix-list prefix-listname Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list, up 10 140 characters.
Parameters access-listname Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters. prefix-list prefix-listname Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface.
match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers. match route-type — redistributes routes that match a route type. match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag. match route-type To match routes based on the how the route is defined, configure a filter.
match tag To redistribute only routes that match a specified tag value, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match tag tag-value tag-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a value as the tag on which to match. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface.
Defaults Not configured. If you do not define a keyword (permit or deny) for the route map, the permit action is the default. Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Use caution when you delete route maps because if you do not specify a sequence number, all route maps with the same map-name are deleted when you use the no route-map map-name command.
To delete a setting, use the no set metric command. Parameters + (OPTIONAL) Enter + to add a metric-value to the redistributed routes. - (OPTIONAL) Enter - to subtract a metric-value from the redistributed routes. metric-value Enter a number as the new metric value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route. set metric — specifies the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. set tag — specifies the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set tag To specify a tag for redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters set tag tag-value tag-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the tag. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295.
show route-map Display the current route map configurations. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show route-map [map-name] map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show route-map route-map firpo, permit, sequence 10 Match clauses: Set clauses: tag 34 Dell# Related Commands route-map — configures a route map.
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
Defaults any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this criteria. source Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was received. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. seq — assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter. deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
• • • • • port port eq = equal to neq = not equal to gt = greater than lt = less than range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: • • • • 218 23 = Telnet 20 and 21 = FTP 25 = SMTP 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED 9.4(0.
monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG).
Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value.
Defaults threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword then a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs are terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval then the time period in minutes at which the ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
3 4 5 6 7 8 0001000000000000 0001100000000000 0001110000000000 0001111000000000 0001111100000000 0001111101000000 1111100000000000 1111110000000000 1111111000000000 1111111100000000 1111111111000000 1111111111111111 4096 6144 7168 7680 7936 8000 6143 7167 7679 7935 7999 8000 2048 1024 512 256 64 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale ( you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic, specify VLAN 1. ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP address of the ARP. opcode code-number Enter the keyword opcode and then enter the number of the ARP opcode. The range is from 1 to 23.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. Version 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. Version 7.4.1.
When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. You cannot include IP, TCP or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type (Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs (ARP and Ether-type) to Layer 2 interfaces only.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order numbers have a higher priority) If you did not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale ( you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic, specify VLAN 1. source-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Parameters any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
Defaults mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous (discontiguous). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address only. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
In the MXL switch, you can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ip-address | any | opcode code-number} command. destinationmac-address mac-addressmask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
You cannot include IP, TCP, or UDP filters in an ACL configured with ARP filters. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
Parameters protocol-typenumber Enter a number from 600 to FFF as the specific Ethernet type traffic to drop. destinationmac-address mac-addressmask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match. The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly.
of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. NOTE: For more information, refer to the Flow-based Monitoring section in the Port Monitoring chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is 0 to 63. message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type. The range is 0 to 255 for ICMP type and 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address. dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value.
interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} command. any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs are stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. bit Enter a flag or combination of bits: • ack: acknowledgement field • fin: finish (no more data from the user) • psh: push function • rst: reset the connection • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
seq arp Configure an egress filter with a sequence number that filters ARP packets meeting this criteria. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics. For specifications, refer to your line card documentation.
numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
• The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order. • If sequence-number is configured, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order.
seq ether-type Configure an egress filter with a specific sequence number that filters traffic with specified types of Ethernet packets. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics. For specifications, refer to your line card documentation.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
Usage Information The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, refer to Port Monitoring. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count] [monitor] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 0 to 65534. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval then by the time period in minutes at which the ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
source Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was received. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ipv6address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
host ipv6address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 address of the host in the x:x:x:x::x format. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two port for the port parameter.) port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit tcp {source address mask | any | host ipv6address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} command. source address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent in the x:x:x:x::x format followed by the prefix length in the /x format. The range is /0 to /128. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
• syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type. The range is from 0 to 255 for ICMP type and from 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255).
deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter to drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets that filter the processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count the bytes that filter the processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
port • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: Defaults • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21= FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
• Parameters Defaults Use the no deny icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} command ` source Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
Version 9.3(0.0) Usage Information Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dscp to match to the IP DSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the order keyword, the ACLs have the lowest order by default as 255. fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress directions.
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This chapter describes the access control list (ACL) VLAN group and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters member vlan {VLAN-range} VLAN-range Enter the member VLANs using comma-separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a single VLAN ID, or a combination.
ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit group-name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP ACLs applied, up to 140 characters. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When an ACL-VLAN-Group name or the Access List Group Name contains more than 30 characters, the name is truncated in the show acl-vlan-group command output. Examples The following sample illustrates the output of the show acl-vlan-group command. NOTE: Some group names and some access list names are truncated.
Group5 Vlan Members : 1,1000 Dell# show cam-acl-vlan Display the number of flow processor (FP) blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services. Syntax show cam-acl-vlan Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.3. (0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. After CAM configuration for ACL VLAN groups is performed, you must reboot the system to enable the settings to be stored in nonvolatile storage.
Example Field Description VlanAclOpt Number of FP blocks for ACL VLAN optimzation feature. Dell#show cam-acl-vlan -- Chassis Vlan Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) VlanOpenFlow : 0 VlanIscsi : 2 VlanHp : 1 VlanFcoe : 1 VlanAclOpt : 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) VlanOpenFlow : 0 VlanIscsi : 2 VlanHp : 1 VlanFcoe : 1 VlanAclOpt : 0 cam-acl-vlan Allocate the number of flow processor (FP) blocks or entries for VLAN services and processes.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. The VLAN ContentAware Processor (VCAP) application is a pre-ingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support the ACL CAM optimization functionality, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VACP groups are present, of which two are for fixed groups and the other two are for dynamic groups.
Example 1: Output of the show camusage Command 292 Field Description LineCard Number of the line card that contains information on ACL VLAN groups Portpipe The hardware path that packets follow through a system for ACL optimization CAM-Region Type of area in the CAM block that is used for ACL VLAN groups Total CAM space Total amount of space in the CAM block Used CAM Amount of CAM space that is currently in use Available CAM Amount of CAM space that is free and remaining to be allocated for A
| 12286 | | 262127 | | 2834 --More-- | IN-L3 FIB | 262141 | 14 | IN-L3-SysFlow | 2878 | 44 Example 2: Output of the show camusage acl Command Dell#show cam-usage acl Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============| =============|============ 11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 0 | 1008 | | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 2 | 1022 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024 Example 3: Output of the show camusage router Command
Example 4: Output of the show camusage switch Command Dell#show cam-usage switch Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============| =============|============== 11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | | 7152 | | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | | 31687 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | | 0 11 | 1 | IN-L2 ACL | 7152 | | 7152 | | IN-L2 FIB | 32768 | | 31687 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 0 | | 0 Used CAM 0 1081 0 0 1081 0 show running config acl-vlan-group Display the running configuration of al
Dell#show running-config acl-vlan-group group1 ! acl-vlan-group group1 description Acl Vlan Group1 member vlan 1-10,400-410,500 ip access-group acl1 out implicit-permit Dell# acl-vlan-group Create an ACL VLAN group. Syntax acl-vlan-group {group name} To remove an ACL VLAN group, use the no acl-vlan-group {group name} command. Parameters group-name Specify the name of the ACL VLAN group. The name can contain a maximum 140 characters.
show acl-vlan-group detail Display all the ACL VLAN Groups or display a specific ACL VLAN Group by name. To display the names in their entirety, the output displays in a line-by-line format. Syntax Parameters show acl-vlan-group detail detail Display information in a line-by-line format to display the names in their entirety. Without the detail option, the output is displayed in a table style and information may be truncated.
description (ACL VLAN Group) Add a description to the ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters description description description Enter a description to identify the ACL VLAN group (80 characters maximum). Default No default behavior or values Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation is based on the standards specified in the IETF Draft draft-ietf-bfd-base-03 and supports BFD on all Layer 3 physical interfaces including virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces and port-channels.
Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS INTERFACE (BFD for VRRP only) Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. All neighbors inherit the timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command except in the following cases: • Timer values configured with the isis bfd all-neighbors commands in INTERFACE mode override timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command.
Command Modes Command History INTERFACE VRRP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd enable (Configuration) Enable BFD on all interfaces. Syntax bfd enable Disable BFD using the no bfd enable command. Defaults BFD is disabled by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd enable (Interface) Enable BFD on an interface.
Parameters interval milliseconds Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 100. min_rx milliseconds Enter the keywords min_rx to specify the minimum rate at which the local system would like to receive control packets from the remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 100.
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show bfd neighbors — displays the BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface. bfd protocol-liveness Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature. Syntax bfd protocol-liveness Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
multiplier value Enter the keywords multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
multiplier value Enter the keyword multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. The default is Active. Defaults See Parameters Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information When you enable a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the bfd neighbor command, the default BFD session parameters are used (interval: 100 milliseconds, min_rx: 100 milliseconds, multiplier: 3 packets, and role: active) if you have not specified parameters with the bfd neighbor command.
• The neighbor does not inherit the global BFD disable values configured with the bfd all-neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • The neighbor only inherits the global timer values configured with the bfd all-neighbor command: interval, min_rx, and multiplier.
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr Clients * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult 10.1.3.1 Gi 1/3 Up 300 Example (Detail) Dell#show bfd neighbors detail Related Commands bfd neighbor — establishes a BFD session with a neighbor.
vrrp bfd neighbor Establish a BFD for VRRP session with a neighbor. Syntax Parameters vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address neighbor ipaddress Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 9 For detailed information about configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
ipv6 unicast Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter BGPv6 mode. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aggregate-address To minimize the number of entries in the routing table, summarize a range of prefixes.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. If routes within the aggregate are constantly changing, do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate as the aggregate flaps to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH.
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor add-path — specifies that this neighbor/peer group can send/receive multiple path advertisements. bgp always-compare-med Allows you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from different external ASs. Syntax bgp always-compare-med To disable comparison of MED, enter no bgp always-compare-med.
Usage Information Before enabling this feature, enable the enable bgp four-octet-assupportcommand. If you disable the four-octect-support command after using dot or dot+ format, the AS numbers revert to asplain text. When you apply an asnotation, it is reflected in the running-configuration. If you change the notation type, the running-config updates dynamically and the new notation shows.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax Include prefixes received from different AS paths during multipath calculation. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax To return to the default BGP routing process, use the no bgp bestpath aspath multipath-relax command.
Usage Information The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath med missing-as-best During path selection, indicate preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over paths with an advertised MED attribute. Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-asbest command.
bgp client-to-client reflection Allows you to enable route reflection between clients in a cluster. Syntax bgp client-to-client reflection To disable client-to-client reflection, use the no bgp client-to-client reflection command. Defaults Enabled when a route reflector is configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed.
The default format for displaying the cluster-id is dotted decimal, but if you enter the cluster-id as an integer, it is displayed as an integer. Related Commands bgp client-to-client reflection — enables route reflection between the route reflector and clients. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. show ip bgp cluster-list — views paths with a cluster ID. bgp confederation identifier Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation.
bgp confederation peers Specify the autonomous systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number] To return to the default, use the no bgp confederation peers command. Parameters as-number Enter the AS number. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format). ...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
Parameters half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes. reuse (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the reuse value, which is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed).
bgp default local-preference Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers. Syntax bgp default local-preference value To return to the default value, use the no bgp default local-preference command. Parameters value Defaults 100 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes.
If you disable the enforce-first-as command, it can be viewed using the show ip protocols command. Related Commands show ip bgp neighbors — views the information the BGP neighbors exchange. show ip protocols — views information on routing protocols. bgp fast-external-failover Enable the fast external failover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
Usage Information Routers supporting 4-byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message. The behavior of a 4-byte router is slightly different depending on whether it is speaking to a 2-byte router or a 4-byte router. When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. Where the 2-byte format is from 1 to 65535, the 4-byte format is from 1 to 4294967295.
BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise it is disabled. Graceful-restart applies to all neighbors with established adjacency. bgp non-deterministic-med Compare MEDs of paths from different autonomous systems. Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs do not have their MEDs compared).
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution using BGP learned routes. During the next-hop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the route’s protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not. The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent.
Area 51 Routing for Networks 10.10.10.0/00 Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 10.10.10.0 Router Id is set to 10.10.10.0 Fast-external-fallover enabled Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH For Address Family IPv4 Unicast BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200 Dell(conf-router_bgp)# Related Commands show ip protocols — views information on all routing protocols enabled and active.
To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command. Defaults Off Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are re-evaluated.
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Syntax Parameters capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000 100-10240000 0 Defaults 40960000 bytes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a size for the capture buffer. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu neighbor — enables capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop — disables next-hop resolution through other routes learned by the BGP. bgp soft-reconfig-backup — turns on BGP Soft Reconfiguration.
filter-list aspath-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list. regexp regularexpression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then regular expressions. Use one or a combination of the following: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences).
Parameters Command Modes Command History peer-groupname Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ip bgp Display all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates. Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out] To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command.
debug ip bgp notifications — views information about BGP notifications. debug ip bgp updates — views information about BGP updates. show debugging — views enabled debugging operations. debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp dampening [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp dampening command. Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only events on inbound BGP messages. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only events on outbound BGP messages. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command.
Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp notifications Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors. Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] command.
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group.. Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command turns on BGP soft-reconfiguration inbound debugging. If no neighbor is specified, debug turns on for all neighbors.
Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. default-metric Allows you to change the metric of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters number Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router bgp — enters ROUTER mode on the switch. max-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax max-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, enter the no maximum-paths command. Parameters ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes.
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the neighbor/peer group in the new AFI/SAFI. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp add-path — allows the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths implicitly replacing any previous ones. neighbor advertisement-interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, before BGP route updates are sent. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path.
neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name] To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} default-originate command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group.
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefixlist-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.
neighbor ebgp-multihop Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl] To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable failover, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 ability to reach the peer remote address and the peer local address. Whenever either address becomes unreachable (for example, no active route exists in the routing table for the peer IP or IPv6 destination/local address), BGP brings down the session with the peer. Related Commands show ip bgp neighbors — displays information on the BGP neighbors.
neighbor local-as To accept external routes from neighbors with a local AS number in the AS number path, configure Internal BGP (IBGP) routers. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as as-number [noprepend] To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} local-as command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value. When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the software sends a message. The range is from 1 to 100 percent. The default is 75. warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log message when the maximum value is reached.
password Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. The first character of the password must be a letter. You cannot use spaces in the password. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur.
peer-groupname Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the name of a configured peer group. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can assign up to 256 peers to one peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
Parameters peer-groupname Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you create a peer group, it is disabled (Shut mode). Related Commands neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns routers to a peer group. neighbor remote-as — assigns a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group.
For passive eBGP limits, the Remote AS must be different from the AS for this neighbor. Related Commands neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound — assigns a subnet to a dynamically configured BGP neighbor. neighbor remote-as — assigns an indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor remote-as Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.
neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} remove-private-as command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS numbers. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers. Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed).
peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not need not to be fully meshed. By default, when you use no route reflector, the internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in the network must be fully meshed.
Usage Information Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shut down, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status. Related Commands show ip bgp summary — displays the current BGP configuration.
neighbor timers Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} timers command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format.
To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} update-source interface command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group. interface Enter the keyword loopback then a number of the Loopback interface. The range is from 0 to 16383. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.
Usage Information In the system best path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred. NOTE: In the system best-path selection process, the path with the highest weight value is preferred. If you configure the set weight command in a route map applied to this neighbor, the weight set in that command overrides the weight set in the neighbor weight command. network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
Usage Information The system software resolves the network address the network command configures with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes. Related Commands redistribute — redistributes routes into BGP. network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the preferred route. Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command.
static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes. These routes are treated as incomplete routes. route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of an established route map. Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported: • match ip address • set metric • set tag If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.
To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process. The range is from 1 to 65535. match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only. match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF internal routes only.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. At least one interface must be in Layer 3 mode for the router bgp command to be accepted. If no interfaces are enabled for Layer 3, an error message appears: % Error: No router id configured Example Dell(conf)#router bgp 3 Dell(conf-router_bgp)# show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system.
0c020a01 04000100 01020080 00000000 PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:50 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] Dell# Related Commands capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — specifies a size for the capture buffer. show config View the current ROUTER BGP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network. network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network address. longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
1239 13716 i *> 63.114.8.33 1239 13716 i * 4.21.132.0/23 6461 16422 i *> 6461 16422 i *> 4.24.118.16/30 *> 4.24.145.0/30 *> 4.24.187.12/30 *> 4.24.202.0/30 *> 4.25.88.0/30 3561 3908 i *> 5.0.0.0/9 *> 5.0.0.0/10 *> 5.0.0.0/11 --More-Related Commands 0 18508 701 63.114.8.33 0 18508 209 63.114.8.33 0 18508 701 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 0 0 0 0 0 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.
Example Field Description Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell#show ip bgp cluster-list BGP table version is 64444683, local router ID is 120.1.1.
You can specify up to eight community numbers to view information on those community groups. local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers. no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
Example Field Description Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 63.114.8.
show ip bgp community-list View routes that a specific community list affects. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. communitylist-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list (maximum 140 characters). exact-match Enter the keyword for an exact match of the communities.
Network Dell# Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampened-paths Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened.
Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
BGPRst 0 : NumGrCfg 1 : DfrdTmestmp 0 : SnmpTrps 0 : IgnrBestPthASP 0 RstOn 1 : RstMod 1 : RstRole 2 : AFFalgs 7 : RstInt 120 : MaxeorExtInt 361 FixedPartCrt 1 : VarParCrt 1 Packet Capture max allowed length 40960000 : current length 0 Peer Grp List Nbr List Confed Peer List Address Family specific Information AFIndex 0 NdSpFlag 0x41a190b0 : AFRttP 0x41a0d200 : NdRTMMkrP 0x41a19d28 : NdRTMAFTblVer 0 : NdRibCtxAddr 1101110688 NdRibCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAFPrefix 0 : NdAfNLRIP 0 : NdAFNLRILen 0 : NdAFWPtrP 0 NdAF
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found. The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.
Example Field Description Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell#show ip bgp filter-list hello BGP table version is 80227, local router ID is 120.1.1.
ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the BGP network address. filter-list aspath-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL. The range is 140 characters. regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match.
Example Field Description Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped. Duration Displays the hours:minutes:seconds since the route first flapped. Reuse Displays the hours:minutes:seconds until the flapped route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the flapping route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell>show ip bgp flap-statistics BGP table version is 210851, local router ID is 63.114.8.
Example Field Description LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell>show ip bgp inconsistent-as BGP table version is 280852, local router ID is 10.1.2.100 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, c - confed-external, r redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next * 3.
advertisedroutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertised-routes to view only the routes the neighbor sent. dampenedroutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords dampened-routes to view information on dampened routes from the BGP neighbor. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view neighborspecific internal information for the IPv4 Unicast address family. flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords flap-statistics to view flap statistics on the neighbor’s routes.
The Lines Beginning with: Description BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID. BGP state Displays the neighbor’s BGP state and the amount of time in hours:minutes:seconds it has been in that state.
The Lines Beginning with: Description Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset. Also states if the peer resets the peering session. If the peering session was never reset, the word never is displayed. Local host: Displays the peering address of the local router and the TCP port number. Foreign host: Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port number. Example (S4810 S4820T) Dell#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 10.10.10.
Prefix advertised 0, denied 4, withdrawn 0 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:18:21, due to Maximum prefix limit reached Example (AdvertisedRoutes) Dell>show ip bgp neighbors 192.14.1.5 advertised-routes BGP table version is 74103, local router ID is 33.33.33.
D 70.70.23.0/24 D 70.70.24.0/24 Dell# Related Commands 100.10.10.2 100.10.10.2 0 0 0 100 200 ? 0 100 200 ? show ip bgp — views the current BGP routing table. show ip bgp next-hop View all next hops (using learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths. Syntax show ip bgp next-hop Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.
show ip bgp paths View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression] regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences).
Example Field Description Path Displays the AS path for the route, with the origin code for the route listed last. Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.
Example Field Description AS-Path Displays the AS paths for this route, with the origin code for the route listed last. Numbers listed between braces {} are AS_SET information.
Example E1200-BGP>show ip bgp paths community Total 293 Communities Address Hash Refcount Community 0x1ec88a5c 3 4 209:209 209:6059 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300 0x1e0f10ec 15 4 209:209 209:3039 209:31272 3908:900 19092:300 0x1c902234 37 2 209:209 209:7193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1f588cd4 41 24 209:209 209:6253 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1e805884 46 2 209:209 209:21226 286:777 286:3033 1899:3033 64675:21092 0x1e433f4c 46 8 209:209 209:5097 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1f173294 48 16 209:209 209
summary Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example (S4810 S4820T) • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the peers in that peer group. The output is the same as that found in the show ip bgp summary command. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp peer-group command shown in the following example.
Example Dell#show ip bgp peer-group Peer-group RT-PEERS Description: ***peering-with-RT*** BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is RT-PEERS Number of peers in this group 20 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 12.1.1.2* 12.1.1.3* 12.1.1.4* 12.1.1.5* 12.1.1.6* 12.2.1.2* 12.2.1.3* 12.2.1.4* 12.2.1.5* 12.2.1.6* 12.3.1.2* 12.3.1.3* 12.3.1.4* 12.3.1.5* 12.3.1.6* 12.4.1.2* 12.4.1.3* 12.4.1.4* 12.4.1.5* 12.4.1.
NOTE: Enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example (S4810) 388 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. • { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string.
11853 11853 11853 *>I 4.19.2.0/23 6167 6167 6167 i *>I 4.19.16.0/23 6167 6167 6167 i *>I 4.21.80.0/22 4200 16559 i *>I 4.21.82.0/24 4200 16559 i *>I 4.21.252.0/23 6389 8063 19198 i *>I 4.23.180.0/24 6128 30576 i *>I 4.36.200.0/21 11854 14135 i *>I 4.67.64.0/22 19281 i *>I 4.78.32.0/21 29748 i *>I 6.1.0.0/16 i *>I 6.2.0.0/22 i *>I 6.3.0.0/18 i 11853 6496 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 1.1.1.
Field Description paths Displays the number of paths and the amount of memory used. denied paths Displays the number of denied paths and the amount of memory used. BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to process them. BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the amount of memory used to process them.
Field Description State/Pfxrcd If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes received. If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix command, (prfxd) appears in this column. If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm). When the peer is transitioning between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase (Purging) may appear in this column.
timers bgp Adjust the BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds. holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the router dead. The range is from 3 to 65535.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information externaldistance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 20.
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampened-paths Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened.
set extcommunity rt To set Route Origin community attributes in Route Map, use this feature. Syntax set extcommunity rt {as4 ASN4:NN [non-trans] | ASN:NNNN [nontrans] | IPADDR:NN [non-trans]} [additive] To delete the Route Origin community, use the no set extcommunity command. Parameters as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 then the 4-octet AS specific extended community number in the format ASN4:NN (4byte AS number:2-byte community value).
set extcommunity soo To set extended community site-of-origin in Route Map, use this feature. Syntax set extcommunity soo {as4 ASN4:NN | ASN:NNNN | IPADDR:NN [nontrans]} To delete the site-of-origin community, use the no set extcommunity command. Parameters as4 ASN4:NN Enter the keyword as4 then the 4-octet AS specific extended community number in the format ASN4:NN (4byte AS number:2-byte community value).
show ip bgp paths extcommunity To display all BGP paths having extended community attributes, use this feature. Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp paths extcommunity command shown in the following example. Field Description Address Displays the internal address where the path attribute is stored.
• Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found. The show ip bgp community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output.
command), BGP sends a route-refresh request to the neighbor and receives all of the peer’s updates. Related Commands clear ip bgp — activates inbound policies without resetting the BGP TCP session. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration.
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging.
Related Commands show ipv6 prefix-list — View the selected IPv6 prefix-list. show ipv6 prefix-list Displays the specified IPv6 prefix list. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 prefix-list detail {prefix-list name} | summary detail Display a detailed description of the selected IPv6 prefix list. prefix-list name Enter the name of the prefix list. NOTE: There is a 140-character limit for prefix list names. summary Command Modes Command History Related Commands Display a summary of RPF routes.
summary Command Modes Command History 402 Display a summary of RPF routes. EXEC Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) 10 Content addressable memory (CAM) commands are supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. WARNING: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance. CAM Profile Commands The CAM profiling feature allows you to partition the CAM to best suit your application.
qos | vman-qos—dual— number | vman-qos—dual—fp number] ipv4pbr number} ecfmacl number fcoeacl number iscsioptacl number} Parameters default Use the default CAM profile settings and set the CAM as follows: • • • • • • • • • • • 404 L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 4 L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 L2PT (L2PT): 0 MAC ACL (IpMacAcl): 0 VmanDualQos: 0 EcfmAcl: 0 FcoeAcl: 4 iscsiOptAcl: 2 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks.
fcoeacl number Enter the keyword fcoeacl and then the number of FP blocks for FCOE ACL. The range is from 0 to 6. Iscsioptacl number Enter the keyword iscsioptacl and then the number of FP blocks for iSCSI optimization ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. vrfv4acl number Enter the keyword vrfv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for VRF IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the number of VRF ACL groups. The total number of VRF ACL groups should not exceed 13.
On the MXL 10/40GbE switch IO module, there can be only one odd number of Blocks in the CLI configuration; the other Blocks must be in factors of two. For example, a CLI configuration of 5+4+2+1+1 Blocks is not supported; a configuration of 6+4+2+1 Blocks is supported. Ranges for the CAM profiles are from 1 to 10, except for the ipv6acl profile which is from 0 to 10. The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of two (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
Usage Information The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl command.
Ipv4pbr : 0 Dell# show cam-acl-egress Display the details of the FP groups allocated for the egress ACL. Syntax show cam-acl-egress Defaults none Command Modes Configuration Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl-egress command.
Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 11 The CoPP commands are supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. control-plane-cpuqos To manage control-plane traffic, enter control-plane mode and configure the switch. Syntax control-plane-cpuqos Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands qos-policy-input — creates a QoS input policy map. policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis. Syntax Parameters service-policy rate-limit-protocols policy-name policy-name Enter the service-policy name, using a string up to 32 characters. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONTROL-PLANE-CPUQOS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command applies the service-policy based on the type of protocol defined in the ACL rules. Create ACL and QoS policies prior to enabling this command.
TCP (TELNET) VRRP Dell# any any 23 any _ _ Q6 Q7 CP CP _ _ show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for each configured IPv6 protocol. Syntax show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Dell# Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 09:00:2b:00:00:04/05 any Q7 CP 413
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for data center bridging features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.1Qaz enhanced transmission selection (ETS), and the data center bridging exchange (DCBX) protocol.
advertise dcbx-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-tlv {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} [ets-conf | etsreco | pfc] [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] To remove the advertised ETS TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-tlv command. Parameters {ets-conf | etsreco | pfc} Enter the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised, where: • ets-conf: enables the advertisement of ETS configuration TLVs. • ets-reco: enables the advertisement of ETS recommend TLVs.
Parameters percentage (Optional) Enter the bandwidth percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Defaults none Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT-ETS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group.
To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. DCB is not supported if you enable link-level flow control on one or more interfaces.
NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future. Related Commands dcb-policy input — applies the input policy with the PFC configuration. dcb-output To associate an ETS configuration with priority traffic, create a DCB output policy.
dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Global Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on stack ports that applies globally throughout the system. Syntax Parameters dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all profile-name dcb-bufferthreshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold. profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length. stack-unit all Enter the stack unit identification.
Default None Command Modes INTERFACE mode Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Usage Information You can configure a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues. By configuring four lossless queues, you can configure four different priorities and assign a particular priority to each application that your network is used to process. For example, you can assign a higher priority for time-sensitive applications and a lower priority for other services, such as file transfers.
• The PFC dot1p priorities result in more than two lossless port queues globally on the switch. • You already enabled link-level flow control. PFC and link-level flow control cannot be enabled at the same time on an interface. In a switch stack, configure all stacked ports with the same PFC configuration. A DCB input policy for PFC applied to an interface may become invalid if you reconfigure the dot1p-queue mapping.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The dcb-policy input stack-unit all command overwrites any previous dcb-policy input stack-unit stack-unit-id configurations. Similarly, a dcb-policy input stack-unit stack-unit-id command overwrites any previous dcb-policy input stack-unit all configuration. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4.(0.0) release.
Related Commands dcb-output — creates a DCB output policy. dcb-policy output stack-unit stack-ports all Apply the specified DCB output policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch. Syntax dcb-policy output stack-unit {all | stack-unit-id} stack-ports all dcb-output-policy-name To remove all DCB output policies applied to the stacked ports, use the no dcbpolicy output stack-unit all command.
dcb stack-unit all pfc-buffering pfc-port-count pfcqueues Configure the PFC buffer for all switches in the stack. Syntax dcb stack-unit all pfc-buffering pfc-port-count {1-56} pfcqueues {1-2} To remove the configuration for the PFC buffer on all switches in the stack, use the no dcb stack-unit all pfc-buffering pfc-port-count pfc-queues command. Parameters pfc-port-count {1-56} Enter the pfc-port count. The range is 1 to 56. pfc-queues {1-2} Enter the pfc-queue number. The range is 1 to 2.
To remove the configuration for the PFC buffer on all port pipes in a specified stack unit, use the no dcb stack-unit stack-unit-id [port-set port-setid] pfc-buffering pfc-ports pfc-queues command. Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information stack-unit-id Enter the stack unit identification. The range is from 0 to 5. port-set Enter the port-set identification. The only valid port-set ID (port-pipe number) on an MXL Switch is 0. pfc-ports {1-56} Enter the pfc-ports.
Parameters config-source | autodownstream | auto-upstream | manual Enter the DCBX port role, where: • config-source: configures the port to serve as the configuration source on the switch. • auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from auto-upstream ports. • auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
• ieee-v2: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1az (Draft 2.5). Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters.
Defaults ETS mode is on. Command Modes DCB OUTPUT POLICY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you disable ETS in an output policy applied to an interface using the no ets mode on command, any previously configured QoS settings at the interface or global level takes effect.
Usage Information This command is available at the global level only. iscsi priority-bits Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured iSCSI priority, use the no iscsi priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF. Version 9.2(0.
thresholdvalue Buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 10 KB. resume-offset Buffer offset limit for resuming in KB thresholdvalue Buffer offset limit at which the port resumes the peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 1 to 7787. The default is 10 KB. sharedthresholdweight Buffer shared threshold weight size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9.
pfc link-delay Configure the link delay used to pause specified priority traffic. Syntax pfc link-delay value To remove the link delay, use the no pfc link-delay command. Parameters value Defaults 45556 quantum Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY Command History The range is (in quanta) from 712 to 65535. One quantum is equal to a 512-bit transmission. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
PFC on all DCB egress ports or configure the dot1p priority-queue assignment of PFC priorities to lossless queues (refer to pfc no-drop queues). To disable PFC operation on an interface, enter the no pfc mode on command in DCB Input Policy Configuration mode. PFC is enabled and disabled as global DCB operation is enabled (dcb-enable) or disabled (no dcb-enable). You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface. Related Commands dcb-input — creates a DCB input policy.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Description heading 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 pfc priority Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay. Syntax pfc priority priority-range To delete the pfc priority configuration, use the no pfc priority command. Parameters priority-range Defaults none Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY Command History Usage Information Enter the 802.1p values of the frames to be paused.
NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future. Related Commands dcb-input — creates a DCB input policy. priority-group To use with an ETS output policy, create an ETS priority group. Syntax priority-group group-name To remove the priority group, use the no priority-group command.
Related Commands • priority-list — configures the 802.1p priorities for an ETS output policy. • set-pgid — configures the priority-group. priority-group qos-policy Associate the 802.1p priority traffic in a priority group with the ETS configuration in a QoS output policy. Syntax priority-group group-name qos-policy ets-policy-name To remove the 802.1p priority group, use the no priority-group qos-policy command. Parameters group-name Enter the group name of the 802.1p priority group.
priority-list Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. Syntax priority-list value To remove the priority list, use the no priority-list command. Parameters value Enter the priority list value. Separate priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, priority-list 3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled to the current queue mapping. dot1p priorities within the same queue must have the same traffic properties and scheduling method. ETS-assigned scheduling applies only to data queues, not to control queues. The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict-queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group.
• priority-list — configures the 802.1p priorities. show dcb Displays the data center bridging status, the number of PFC-enabled ports, and the number of PFCenabled queues. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] unit number Enter the DCB unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To clear DCBX frame counters, use the clear dcbx counters interface stack-unit/port command. The following describes the show interface dcbx detail command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number.
Example Field Description Local DCBX Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: Protocol State Current operational state of the DCBX protocol: ACK or INSYNC. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs received from the peer device.
DCBX Operational Status is Enabled Is Configuration Source? TRUE Local DCBX Compatibility mode is CEE Local DCBX Configured mode is CEE Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted: ErPfi Local DCBX Status ----------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total
Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Max Supported TC Group Maximum number of priority groups supported. Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802.1p priorities currently configured. Admin mode ETS mode: on or off. When on, the scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a DCBX TLV from a peer can take effect on an interface.
Example (Summary) Field Description ETS TLV Statistic: Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted. ETS TLV Statistic: Error Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Error Configuration TLVs received.
Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example (Detail) Dell(conf)# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/0 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disa
TLV Pkts show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show interface port-type slot/port pfc {summary | detail} port-type slot/ port pfc Enter the port-type slot and port PFC information. {summary | detail} Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results. INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.
Field Description Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational PFC configuration: • Init: Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. • Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from the peer. • Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from the configuration source. PFC DCBX Oper status Operational status for the exchange of the PFC configuration on the local port: match (up) or mismatch (down).
Example (Summary) Field Description PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received.
show interface pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted (by dot1p priority class) on an interface. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example (Summary) show interface port-type slot/port pfc statistics port-type Enter the port type. slot/port Enter the slot/port number. INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information Example NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future. Dell(conf)# show qos dcb-input dcb-input pfc-profile pfc link-delay 32 pfc priority 0-1 dcb-input pfc-profile1 no pfc mode on pfc priority 6-7 show qos dcb-output Displays the ETS configuration in a DCB output policy.
show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group. Syntax show qos priority-groups Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2
Parameters KB Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. Default None. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Configure the maximum shared buffer available for PFC traffic. You can choose to increase or decrease the shared buffer that is currently allocated in the system by default. You must configure the shared buffer size to be less than the total PFC buffer size.
Example Dell(conf)#dcb buffer—threshold test dcb enable pfc-queues Configure the number of PFC queues. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History dcb enable pfc-queues value value Enter the number of PFC queues. The range is from 1 to 4. The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured will depend on the buffer. CONFIGURATION mode Version 9.3(0.0) Supported on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
Usage Information Limitations Related Commands PFC and ETS are enabled by default on the interfaces when DCB is globally enabled (refer to dcb enable). In some network topology, you may want to disable PFC on an interface and apply link level flow control; Similarly you may want to disable ETS on an interface and apply QoS bandwidth configurations. • “dcb-map” CLI on interface is mutually exclusive to “no dcb ets enable” and “no dcb pfc enable”.
to be allocated for each priority and the pause or resume thresholds for the buffer. This method of configuration enables you to effectively manage and administer the behavior of lossless queues. Example Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#dcb-policy buffer-threshold test dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Global Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on stack ports that applies globally throughout the system.
pfc mode on Enable the PFC configuration on the port so that the priorities are included in DCBX negotiation with peer PFC devices. Syntax pfc mode on To disable the PFC configuration, use the no pfc mode on command. Defaults PFC mode is on. Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic.
dot1p1_groupnum dot1p2_groupnum dot1p3_groupnum dot1p4_groupnum dot1p5_groupnum dot1p6_groupnum dot1p7_groupnum Defaults None Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch module platform. PFC and ETS settings are not pre-configured on Ethernet ports. You must use the dcb-map command to configure different groups of 802.1p priorities with PFC and ETS settings.
priority-group bandwidth pfc— configures the ETS bandwidth allocation and the PFC setting used to manage the port traffic in an 802.1p priority group. qos-policy-buffer Create a QoS policy buffer and enter the configuration mode to configure the no-drop queues, ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing, and buffer offset limit for resuming.
sharedthresholdweight Buffer shared threshold weight size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range from 0 to 9. The default shared threshold weight is 10. Default The default size of the ingress buffer is 45 KB. The default buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer and recommences the sending of packets to the peer is 10 KB. The default threshold weight of the shared buffer space is 10.
show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map. FC Flex IO Modules with MXL Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show qos dcb-map map-name map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.3(0.0) Displays the PFC and ETS parameters configured in the specified map. Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch.
PG:1 TSA:ETS Priorities:3 Related Commands BW:50 PFC:ON dcb-map — creates a DCB map to configure PFC and ETS parameters and applies the PFC and ETS settings on Ethernet ports. show stack-unit stack-ports pfc details Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on stacked ports, including PFC Operational mode on each unit with the configured priorities, link delay, and number of pause packets sent and received.
13 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • Offline Diagnostic Commands • Buffer Tuning Commands • Hardware Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, the Dell operating system results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory.
level1 Enter the keyword Level1 to run Level 1 diagnostics. Level 1 diagnostics is a smaller set of diagnostic tests with support for automatic partitioning. They perform status/self test for all the components on the board and test their registers for appropriate values. In addition, they perform extensive tests on memory devices (for example, SDRAM, flash, NVRAM, EEPROM, and CPLD) wherever possible. There are no tests on 10G links. At this level, stack ports are shut down automatically.
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process. A warning message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented. Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with Offline-Diags [confirm yes/no]:y online stack-unit Place a stack unit in the online state.
dynamic Enter the keyword dynamic to configure the amount of dynamic buffer space per Field Processor. packetspointers Enter the keywords packets-pointers to configure the number of packet pointers per queue. queue0 number Enter the keyword queue0 and the number to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers to Queue 0. queue1 number queue2 number queue3 number Defaults none Command Modes BUFFER PROFILE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
buffer (Configuration) Apply a buffer profile to all Field or Switch Fabric processors in a port-pipe. Syntax Parameters buffer [csf | fp-uplink] port-set port-pipe buffer-policy buffer-profile csf Enter the keyword csf to apply a buffer profile to all Switch Fabric processors in a port-pipe. fp-uplink Enter the keyword fp-uplink to apply a buffer profile to all Field Processors in a a port-pipe. port-set portpipe Enter the keywords port-set then the port-pipe number. The range is 0 to 1.
buffer-profile (Configuration) Create a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface. Syntax Parameters buffer-profile {fp | csf] profile-name {global {1Q | | 4q} fp Enter the keyword fp to create a buffer profile for the Field Processor. csf Enter the keyword csf to create a buffer profile for the Switch Fabric Processor. profile-name Create a name for the buffer profile, global Apply one of two pre-defined buffer profiles to all of the port-pipes in the system.
buffer-profile (Interface) Apply a buffer profile to an interface. Syntax Parameters buffer-profile profile-name profile-name Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the name of the buffer profile you want to apply to the interface. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. buffer-profile (Configuration) – creates a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface.
Related Commands buffer-profile (Configuration) — Creates a buffer profile that can be applied to an interface. show buffer-profile interface Display the buffer profile that is applied to an interface. Syntax Parameters show buffer-profile {detail | summary} interface interface slot/port detail Display the buffer allocations of a buffer profile. summary Display the Field Processors and Switch Fabric Processors that are applied to the system.
Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components. Syntax Parameters clear hardware stack-unit 0–5 {counters | unit 0–1 counters | cpu data-plane statistics | cpu party-bus statistics | stackport 0–52} stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific collection of data.
clear hardware system-flow Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components. Syntax Parameters clear hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit 0–5 port-set 0–0 counters stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific collection of data.
show hardware layer3 Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax Parameters show hardware layer3 {acl | qos} stack-unit 0–5 port-set 0–0 acl | qos Enter either the keyword acl or the keyword qos to select between ACL or QoS data. stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then a numeral from 0 to 5 to select a stack ID. port-set 0–0 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number.
unit and port (1-56), and queue (0-14 or all), and buffer-info. The buffer unit default is 1. phy-firmwareversion Each member of the stack is updated automatically with the latest firmware while booting as well as during OIR. To dump the physical firmware version for stack units, enter the keywords phy-firmware-version.
===================================================== 41 Present 01.06 01.06 42 Present 01.06 01.06 43 Present 01.06 01.06 44 Present 01.06 01.06 45 Present 01.06 01.06 46 Present 01.06 01.06 47 Present 01.06 01.06 48 Present 01.06 01.06 49 Not Present N/A N/A Dell# In the above example, the Status field represents presence of OPTM ports, Programmed versionfield represents loaded firmware version, and SW version represents the SDK version.
txPkt(UNIT0) Dell# :0 Example Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 8189 packets, 8076608 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 366 packets, 133100 bytes 0 errors Dell# Example (drops) Dell#show hard stack-unit 0 drops UNIT No: 0 Total Total Total Total Total Dell# Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Mmu Drops EgMac Drops Egress Drops : : : : : 7841475 0 0 0 43321 Example (drop summary) Dell#show hard stack-unit 0 drops unit 0 Example (drop counters) Dell#show
L2MC Drops PKT Drops of ANY Conditions Hg MacUnderflow TX Err PKT Counter Dell# Example (portstatistics) Example (register) 478 : : : : 0 0 0 0 25 Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP lrn loop port link duplex scan neg? state pause discrd ops back xe0 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe1 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe2 up 1G FD SW Yes Forward None FA xe3 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe4 down 10G FD SW Yes Block None FA xe5 !ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F xe6
0x0333a000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe18 = 0x00000000 0x0333e000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe19 = 0x00000000 0x03333000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe20 = 0x00000000 0x03337000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe21 = 0x00000000 0x0333b000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe22 = 0x00000000 0x0333f000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe23 = 0x00000000 0x03334000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe24 = 0x00000000 0x03338000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe25 = 0x00000000 0x0333c000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe26 = 0x00000000 0x03340000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe27 = 0x00000000 0x03335000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe28 = 0x00000000 0x03339000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.
The linkStatus of Front End Port 27 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 28 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 29 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 30 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 31 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 32 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 37 is FALSE !------------------ output truncated ---------------! Example (buffer) Dell(conf)#sh hardware stack-unit 0 buffer total-buffer Dell#sh hardware stack-unit 0 buffer total-buffer Total Buffers alloc
Parameters acl | qos For the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe, display which system flow entry the packet hits and what queue the packet takes as it dumps the raw system flow tables. stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a stack member ID. port-set 0–0 [counters] Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display hit counters for the selected ACL or QoS option.
, FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=0, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################ FP Entry for redirecting LLDP BPDU to RSM ################ EID 2047: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x01, prio=0x7ff, flags=0x82, Instal
KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00210000 00000000 00000000 , FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=3, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################# FP Entry for redirecting ARP Replies to RSM ############# EID
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 14 Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine. An MXL switch can operate as a DHCP server or DHCP client. As a DHCP client, the switch requests an IP address from a DHCP server.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Entering after the clear ip dhcp binding command clears all the IPs from the binding table. debug ip dhcp server Display the Dell Networking OS debugging messages for DHCP. Syntax Parameters debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] events Enter the keyword events to display the DHCP state changes.
disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dns-server Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool. Syntax Parameters dns-server address [address2...address8] address Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool. Syntax Parameters excluded-address [address | low-address high-address] address Enter a single address to be excluded from the pool. low-address Enter the lowest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool. high-address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.
host For manual (rather than automatic) configurations, assign a host to a single-address pool. Syntax Parameters host address address/mask Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the host IP address and subnet mask. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. lease Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool. Syntax Parameters lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} days Enter the number of days of the lease. The range is from 0 to 31.
Parameters address Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the address of the NETBIOS name server. You may enter up to eight, in order of preference. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. netbios-node-type Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) recommends specifying clients as hybrid.
Command Modes Command History DHCP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp binding Display the DHCP binding table. Syntax show ip dhcp binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name] pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp server Display the DHCP server statistics. Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Client To configure the system to be a DHCP client, use the following commands.
interface type slot/port command. If you later enter the no shutdown] command and the lease timer for the dynamic IP address has expired, the IP address is unconfigured and the interface tries to acquire a new dynamic address from DHCP server. You cannot configure a secondary (backup) IP address on an interface using the ip address dhcp command; you must use the ip address command at the interface configuration level.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ip dhcp clients events Enable the display of log messages for the following events on DHCP client interfaces: IP address acquisition, IP address release, Renewal of IP address and lease time, and Release of an IP address.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. release dhcp interface Release the dynamically-acquired IP address on an Ethernet interface while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface. Syntax Parameters release dhcp interface type slot/port interface type slot/port Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
• Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 For a 40-GigabitEthernet Ethernet interface, enter FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot/port numbers; for example, fortygigabitethernet 0/2. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you enter the renew dhcp command, a new dynamic IP address is acquired on the specified Ethernet interface for the renewed lease time.
show ip dhcp lease Display lease information about the dynamic IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client-enabled interface. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp lease [interface type slot/port] interface type slot/port Display DHCP lease information on the specified interface. • For a 10-GigabitEthernet Ethernet interface, enter TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port numbers; for example, tengigabitethernet 1/3.
arp inspection-trust Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table. Syntax arp inspection-trust Defaults Disabled Command Modes • INTERFACE • INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. arp inspection — enables dynamic ARP inspection on a VLAN. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table.
Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN. After disabling DHCP snooping, the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection are disabled. Introduced in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, DHCP snooping was available for Layer 3 only and dependent on DHCP Relay Agent (ip helper-address). The Dell Networking OS version 8.2.1.
• For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE. Enter the slot and port number of the interface. lease time Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address are leased. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Related Commands For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet. slot/port Defaults Command History • Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable the IP Source Guard. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation [ipmac] ipmac Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. 1.
NOTE: Learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN. Related Commands ip dhcp snooping trust — configures an interface as trusted. ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82. Syntax Parameters ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id | trust-downstream] remote-id Configure the system to enable the remote-id string in option-82. trustdownstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the previous-hop router.
Related Commands clear ip dhcp snooping — clears the contents of the DHCP binding table. ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History 502 Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) 15 Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on the Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold. Syntax ecmp-group {ecmp-group-id interface interface | link-bundlemonitor} To remove the selected interface, use the ecmp-group no interface command.
hash-algorithm Changes the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across a Port Channel. Syntax hash-algorithm {algorithm-number | {ecmp {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | crc-upper | dest-ip | lsb | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16} [number] lag {checksum | crc | xor} [number] nh-ecmp {checksum | crc | xor}[number] linecard number ip-sa-mask value ip-da-mask value | seed seed-value } To return to the default hash algorithm, use the no hash-algorithm command.
linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard then the linecard slot number. ip-sa-mask value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ip-sa-mask then the ECMP/LAG hash mask value. The range is from 0 to FF. The default is FF. ip-da-mask value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ip-da-mask then the ECMP/LAG hash mask value. The range is from 0 to FF. The default is FF. Defaults 0 for hash-algorithm value on TeraScale and ExaScale IPSA and IPDA mask value is FF for a line card.
• hash-algorithm linecard 2 ip-sa-mask 00 ip-da-mask aa The different hash algorithms are based on the number of Port Channel members and packet values. The default hash algorithm (number 0) yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if the default algorithm does not provide a satisfactory distribution of traffic, use the hash-algorithm command to designate another algorithm.
The different hash algorithms are based on the number of ECMP group members and packet values. The default hash algorithm yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if the default algorithm does not provide satisfactory distribution of traffic, use this command to designate another algorithm. When a member leaves or is added to the ECMP group, the hash algorithm is recalculated to balance traffic across the members.
NOTE: While the seed is stored separately on each port-pipe, the same seed is used across all CAMs. You cannot separate LAG and ECMP but you can use different algorithms across the chassis with the same seed. If LAG member ports span multiple port-pipes and line cards, set the seed to the same value on each port-pipe to achieve deterministic behavior. If the hash algorithm configuration is removed, the hash seed does not go to the original factory default setting.
Parameters Command Modes Command History percent Indicate the threshold value when traffic distribution starts being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. The range is from 1 to 90%. The default is 60%. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. link-bundle-monitor enable Provides a mechanism to enable monitoring of traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. Syntax link-bundle-monitor enable To exit from ECMP group mode, use the exit command.
show link-bundle distribution Display the link-bundle distribution for the interfaces in the bundle, type of bundle (LAG or ECMP), and the most recently calculated interface utilization (either bytes per second rate or maximum rate) for each interface. Syntax show link-bundle-distribution Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example 510 Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
FIPS Cryptography 16 To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax [no] fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show fips status FIPS Mode: Enabled Dell# show ip ssh Display information about established SSH sessions Syntax show ip ssh Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ssh Open an SSH connection specifying the hostname, username, port number, and version of the SSH client. Syntax Parameters ssh {hostname | ipv4 address | ipv6 address} [-c encryption cipher | -l username | -m HMAC alogorithm | -p port-number | -v {1|2}] hostname (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address or the hostname of the remote device. ipv4 address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format A.B.C.D.
• -p portnumber hmac-sha1–96: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1–96 HMAC algorithm. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —p then the port number. The range is 1 to 65536 The default is 22 -v {1|2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —v then the SSH version 1 or 2. The default: The version from the protocol negotiation. NOTE: If the FIPS mode is enabled, this option does not display in the output. Defaults As indicated above. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.
17 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, an MXL Switch can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on Fibre Channel over Ethernet initialization protocol (FIP) packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically-created ACLs to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF.
clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear fip-snooping statistics [interface vlan vlan-id | interface port-type port/slot | interface port-channel portchannel-number] vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared. port-type port/ slot Enter the port-type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared.
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. feature fip-snooping Enable FCoE transit and FIP snooping on a switch. Syntax feature fip-snooping To disable the FCoE transit feature, use the no feature fip-snooping command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
fip-snooping fc-map Configure the FC-MAP value FIP snooping uses on all VLANs. Syntax fip-snooping fc-map fc-map-value To return the configured FM-MAP value to the default value, use the no fipsnooping fc-map command. Parameters fc-map-value Enter the FC-MAP value FIP snooping uses. The range is from 0EFC00 to 0EFCFF. Defaults 0x0EFC00 Command Modes • CONFIGURATION • VLAN INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
show fip-snooping config Display the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. Syntax show fip-snooping config Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Field Description FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID the FCF assigns. Dell# show fip-snooping enode Enode MAC Enode Interface FCF MAC VLAN FC-ID ----------------------- ---------- ----d4:ae:52:1b:e3:cd Te 0/11 54:7f:ee:37:34:40 100 62:00:11 show fip-snooping fcf Display information on the FCFs in FIP-snooped sessions, including the FCF interface and MAC address, FCF interface, VLAN ID, FC-MAP value, FKA advertisement period, and number of ENodes connected.
------------54:7f:ee:37:34:40 Po 22 100 0e:fc:00 4000 2 show fip-snooping sessions Display information on FIP-snooped sessions on all VLANs or a specified VLAN, including the ENode interface and MAC address, the FCF interface and MAC address, VLAN ID, FCoE MAC address and FCoE session ID number (FC-ID), worldwide node name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN).
21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:02 01:00:02 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:03 01:00:03 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:04 01:00:04 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 0e:fc:00:01:00:05 01:00:05 21:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:00 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:01 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:02 41:00:0e:fc:00:00:00:03 show fip-snooping statistics Display statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all interfaces, including VLANs, physical ports, and port channels.
FIP Snooping Field Description Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snoop FLOGI request frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Number of FIP-snoop FDISC request frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Number of FIP-snoop FLOGO frames received on the interface Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snoop ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface.
Field Description due to Hardware Config Example Dell# show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan 100 Number of Vlan Requests :0 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :2 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :2 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :9021 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3349 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :4437 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement :2 Number of FLOGI Accepts :2 Number of FLOGI R
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :4451 Unicast Discovery Advertisement :2 FLOGI Accepts :2 FLOGI Rejects :0 FDISC Accepts :16 FDISC Rejects :0 FLOGO Accepts :0 FLOGO Rejects :0 CVL :0 FCF Discovery Timeouts :0 VN Port Session Timeouts :0 Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 show fip-snooping system Display information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabl
*1 100 526 0X0EFC00 1 2 17 FIP Snooping
18 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) Force10 resilient ring protocol (FRRP) is supported on Dell Networking MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a highspeed token across a ring to verify the link status.
• Example hello Rx and Tx counters • Topology change Rx and Tx counters • The number of state change counters Dell#clear frrp Clear frrp statistics counter on all ring [confirm] yes Dell#clear frrp 4 Clear frrp statistics counter for ring 4 [confirm] yes Dell# Related Commands show frrp — displays the resilient ring protocol configuration. debug frrp Clear the FRRP statistics counters.
description Enter an identifying description of the ring. Syntax description Word To remove the ring description, use the no description [Word] command. Parameters Word Enter a description of the ring. Maximum: 255 characters. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol. Syntax disable To enable the Resilient Ring Protocol, use the no disable command.
secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id • Fast Ethernet interface: enter the keyword FastEthernet then the slot/port information. • Port Channel interface: enter the keyword portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Parameters vlan-range Enter the member VLANs using VLAN IDs (separated by commas), a range of VLAN IDs (separated by a hyphen), a single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example: VLAN IDs (comma-separated): 3, 4, 6. Range (hyphen-separated): 5-10. Combination: 3, 4, 5-10, 8. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mode Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command places you into the resilient ring protocol. After executing this command, the command line prompt changes to conf-frrp. show frrp Display the resilient ring protocol configuration. Syntax Parameters show frrp [ring-id [summary]] | [summary] ring-id Enter the ring identification number.
Secondary: Port-channel 100 State: Blocking Control Vlan: 1 Ring protocol Timers: Hello-Interval 50 msec Dead-Interval 150 msec Ring Master's MAC Address is 00:01:e8:13:a3:19 Topology Change Statistics: Tx:110 Rx:45 Hello Statistics: Tx:13028 Rx:12348 Number of state Changes: 34 Member Vlans: 1000-1009 Dell# Example (2 Summary) Dell#show frrp 2 summary Related Commands protocol frrp — enters the resilient ring protocol and designate a ring identification.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information 534 CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node. The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time-out occurs.
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) 19 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the basic GVRP commands. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.
• VLANs created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP-enabled device is sending updates. If the devices no longer send updates, or GVRP is disabled, or the system is rebooted, all dynamic VLANs are removed. • GVRP manages the active topology, not non-topological data such as VLAN protocols. If a local bridge must classify and analyze packets by VLAN protocols, manually configure protocol-based VLANs, and simply rely on GVRP for VLAN updates.
Parameters config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/ LEAVE events. pdu Enter the keyword pdu then one of the following Interface keywords and slot/port or number information: Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages. Syntax garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} To return to the previous setting, use the no garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} command. Parameters join Enter the keyword join then the number of milliseconds to configure the join time. The range is from 100 to 147483647 milliseconds. The default is 200 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100.
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. Syntax gvrp enable To disable GVRP on the interface, use the no gvrp enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable — globally disables GVRP. gvrp registration Configure the GVRP register type. Syntax gvrp registration {fixed | normal | forbidden} To return to the default, use the gvrp register normal command.
To advertise or learn about VLANs through GVRP, use the forbidden command when you do not want the interface. Related Commands show gvrp — displays the GVRP configuration including the registration. protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol — (config-gvrp)#. Syntax protocol gvrp Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable — globally disables GVRP.
Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show garp timers GARP Timers Value (milliseconds) ---------------------------------------Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 LeaveAll Timer 10000 Dell# Related Commands garp timers — sets the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages. show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration.
Example R3#show gvrp brief GVRP Feature is currently enabled. Port GVRP Status Edge-Port ---------------------------------------------Gi 3/0 Disabled No Gi 3/1 Disabled No Gi 3/2 Enabled No Gi 3/3 Disabled No Gi 3/4 Disabled No Gi 3/5 Disabled No Gi 3/6 Disabled No Gi 3/7 Disabled No Gi 3/8 Disabled No R3#show gvrp brief Related Commands show gvrp statistics — displays the GVRP statistics. clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface.
• The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid attribute length. • The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid GARP event. • The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 - 4095. A failed registration can occur for the following reasons: Example • Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP Blocking state). • An entry for a new GVRP VLAN could not be created in the GVRP database.
* 1 Active G 10 Active leanred vlan) Dell Related Commands 544 U Te 3/20 U Te 5/20-21 G Po128(Te 5/49) (dynamically show gvrp statistics — displays the GVRP statistics.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 20 The IGMP commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). IGMP Snooping Commands The Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping • The Dell Networking OS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
• If the IP SA of the incoming IGMP general query is higher than the VLAN IP address, the switch continues to work as an IGMP snooping Querier. ip igmp access-group To specify access control for packets, use this feature. Syntax ip igmp access-group access-list To remove the feature, use the no ip igmp access-group access-list command. Parameters access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL (16 characters maximum).
ip igmp querier-timeout Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that should be the querier. Syntax ip igmp querier-timeout seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip igmp querier-timeout command. Parameters seconds Defaults 125 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier. The range is from 60 to 300.
ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-max-resp-time command. Parameters seconds Defaults 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time. The range is from 1 to 25. The default is 10 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command. When you enable this command from CONFIGURATION mode, IGMP snooping enables on all VLAN interfaces (except the default VLAN). NOTE: Execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP Snooping to function. Related Commands shutdown — (no shutdown) activates an interface.
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you disable flooding, unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast router ports, both static and dynamic, in a VLAN. If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN, unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped.
To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command. Parameters interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter Display multicast router interfaces. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example 552 show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan number] vlan number • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
21 Interfaces The commands in this chapter are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • Basic Interface Commands • Port Channel Commands Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) groups, virtual local area networks (VLANs), and physical interfaces, or selected ones.
vrrp [vrf instance] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear the counters of all VRRP groups. To clear the counters of VRRP groups in a specified VRF instance, enter the name of the instance (32 characters maximum). learning-limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords learning-limit to clear unknown source address (SA) drop counters when MAC learning limit is configured on the interface. Defaults Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information On the MXL switch, after you enter the clear counters command and verify the results with the show interfaces command, the line rate is not reset to 0.00%.
For details about using XFP ports with CX4 cables, refer to your MXL switch hardware guide. Example (Unsuccessful) Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/26 | grep "XFP type" Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-CX4 Dell(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length short % Error: Unsupported command. Dell(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length medium % Error: Unsupported command. Dell(conf-if-te-0/26)#cx4-cable-length long % Error: Unsupported command.
max-suppresstime Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-) Command History Usage Information Enter the maximum number for which a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The range is from 1 to 86400. The default is 20 seconds. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Important Points to Remember: • Spaces between characters are not preserved after entering this command unless you enclose the entire description in quotation marks (“desc_text”).
Usage Information This command applies to any physical interface with speed set to 1000/10000. Related Commands speed (for 1000/10000/auto interfaces) — sets the speed on the Base-T Ethernet interface. NOTE: Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, when you use a copper SFP2 module with catalog number GP-SFP2-1T in the S25P module, you can manually set its speed with the speed command. When you set the speed to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, you can also execute the duplex command.
the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable the reception of frames with a destination address equal to this multicast address. The pause: • • Starts when either the packet pointer or the buffer threshold is met (whichever is met first). When the discard threshold is met, packets are dropped. Ends when both the packet pointer and the buffer threshold fall below 50% of the threshold settings. The discard threshold defines when the interface starts dropping the packet on the interface.
LocRxConf LocTxConf RemoteRxConf RemoteTxConf off off off off off on on off on on Related Commands off on off off on on off on off on on off off off on on off on off on on on off off on on off on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on show runn
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Fibre Channel interface, enter the keyword FibreChannel, then the slot/port information. Version 9.4(0.0) Added the support for interfaces. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Parameters number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Enter a number as the interface number. The range is from 0 to 16383. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell(conf)#interface loopback 1655 Dell(conf-if-lo-1655)# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface.
Example Dell(conf)#interface managementethernet 0/0 Dell(conf-if-ma-0/0)# interface null Configure a Null interface on the switch. Syntax Parameters interface null number number Enter zero (0) as the Null interface number. Defaults Not configured; number = 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface range and one of the interfaces — slot/port, port-channel, or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. You can enter up to six comma-separated ranges. Spaces are not required between the commas. Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs, port-channels, and physical interfaces. Slot/Port information must contain a space before and after the dash.
Example (Bulk) Dell(conf)#interface range so 2/0-1, te 10/0, gi 3/0, fa 0/0 % Warning: Non-existing ports (not configured) are ignored by interface-range Example (Multiple Ports) Dell(conf)#interface range gi 2/0 - 23, gi 2/1 - 10 Dell(conf-if-range-gi-2/0-23# Example (Overlapping Ports) Dell(conf)#interface range gi 2/1 - 11, gi 2/1 - 23 Dell(conf-if-range-gi-2/1-23# Usage Information Only VLAN and port-channel interfaces created using the interface vlan and interface port-channel commands can be us
interface vlan — configures a VLAN interface. show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) — shows the bulk configuration interfaces. show range — shows the bulk configuration ranges. interface range macro (define) Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration. Syntax Parameters define interface range macro name interface , interface , ... name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name. interface, interface,...
Example (Single Range) This example shows how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the show running-config command to display the macro definition.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN. You can configure up to 4096 VLANs. Syntax interface vlan vlan-id To delete a VLAN, use the no interface vlan vlan-id command. Parameters vlan-id Enter a number as the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4096. Defaults Not configured, except for the Default VLAN, which is configured as VLAN 1. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you configure interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled, also configure CR4 with auto-negotiation. Many DAC cable link issues are resolved by setting the interface type as CR4. Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface.
monitor interface Monitor counters on a single interface or all interfaces on a line card. The screen is refreshed every five seconds and the CLI prompt disappears. Syntax monitor interface [interface] To disable monitoring and return to the CLI prompt, press the q key.
Example (Single Interface) Key Description l Change the view to the next interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the next line card in the chassis. a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the previous line card in the chassis. T Increase the screen refresh rate. t Decrease the screen refresh rate. q Return to the CLI prompt. systest-3 Monitor time: 00:00:06 Refresh Intvl.
Defaults 1554 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If the packet includes a Layer 2 header, the difference between the link MTU and IP MTU (ip mtu command) must be enough bytes to include the Layer 2 header.
Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface. Syntax negotiation auto To disable auto-negotiation, use the no negotiation auto command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example (Master/Slave) Dell(conf)# int tengig 0/0 Dell(conf-if)#neg auto Dell(conf-if-autoneg)# ? end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode mode Specify autoneg mode no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show autoneg configuration information Dell(conf-if-autoneg)#mode ? forced-master Force port to master mode forced-slave Force port to slave mode Dell(conf-if-autoneg)# Example (Master/Slave, partial) Dell#show interfaces configured TenGigabitEthernet 13/18 is up,
• Up at 100 Mb/s • Down • Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto. Related Commands speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) — sets the link speed to 1000, 10000, or autonegotiate the speed. portmode hybrid To accept both tagged and untagged frames, set a physical port or port-channel. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
NOTE: Remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the hybrid configuration from the port.
rate-interval Configure the traffic sampling interval on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters rate-interval seconds seconds Enter the number of seconds for which to collect traffic data. The range is from 5 to 299 seconds. NOTE: For 0 to 5 seconds, polling occurs every 5 seconds. For 6 to 10 seconds, polling occurs every 10 seconds. For any other value, polling occurs every 15 seconds. Defaults 299 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.
show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) Display the bulk configured interfaces (interface range). Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range) Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Starting with Dell Networking OS Release 9.3(0.0), you can also view the configuration of 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces by using the fortyGigE keyword with the show interface interface-type brief command. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE followed by the slot/port information to indicate the interface.
Line Description Last clearing... Displays the time when the show interfaces counters where cleared. Queuing strategy... States the packet queuing strategy. FIFO means first in first out.
Line Description Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to 299 seconds). Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate. Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 21:14:32 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 94322888 packets, 6036664832 bytes 94322888 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 94322888 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 180384 packets, 11926850 bytes, 0 underruns 172622 64-by
show interfaces switchport — displays Layer 2 information about the interfaces. show inventory — displays the MXL switch type, components (including media), Dell Networking OS version including hardware identification numbers, and configured protocols. show ip interface — displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show memory — displays the stack unit(s) status. show range — displays all interfaces configured using the interface range command.
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:04:59 Dell# Related Commands show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information. Syntax Parameters show interfaces dampening [[interface] [summary] [detail]] interface • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
show interfaces configured — displays any interface with a non-default configuration. show interfaces description Display the descriptions configured on the interface. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 586 show interfaces [interface] description interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (Optional) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
Example Related Commands Field Description Description Displays the description (if any) manually configured for the interface.
Interface index is 34148609 Internet address is not set Mode of IP Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :tenG130001ec9f10005 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 5d5h24m Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts,
Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
stack-unit unitid Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack member number. The range is from 0 to 5. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show interfaces switchport command for the following example. Items Description Name Displays the interface’s type, slot, and port number. 802.
802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Q Vlans Dell# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface on the switch. show ip interface — displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show interfaces transceiver — displays the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.
Line Description Bias High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. TX Power High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. RX Power High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Interfaces Line Description Voltage Current voltage of the SFPs. If this voltage crosses voltage high alarm/warning thresholds, the voltage high alarm/ warning flag is set to true. Tx Bias Current Present transmission (Tx) bias current of the SFP. If this crosses bias high alarm/warning thresholds, the TX bias high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning thresholds, the TX bias low alarm/warning flag is set to true. Tx Power Present Tx power of the SFP.
Example Line Description Temperature Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value displayed above. Voltage Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value displayed above. Tx Bias Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Tx bias current value displayed above. Tx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above.
SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Length(50um) 10m = 0x1e Length(62.
=================================== !-------output truncated -------------------------! Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface on the switch. show ip interface — displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show inventory — displays the switch type, components (including media), the Dell Networking OS version including hardware identification numbers, and configured protocols.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an interface is disabled, use the show ip interface brief command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down. Disabling a VLAN or a port channel causes different behavior. When you disable a VLAN, the Layer 3 functions within that VLAN are disabled. Layer 2 traffic continues to flow.
Defaults auto Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is found on the 1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. When you enable auto, the system performs an automatic discovery to determine the optics installed and configure the appropriate speed. When you configure a speed for the 1000/10000 interface, confirm the negotiation auto command setting.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Splitting a 40G port into 4x10G port is supported on standalone and stacked units. • You cannot use split ports as stack-link to stack an MXL Switch. • The split ports MXL switch unit cannot be a part of any stacked system. • The unit number with the split ports must be the default (stack-unit 0). • This set up can be verified using show system brief command.
• • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands description — assigns a descriptive text string to the interface. interface port-channel — creates a Port Channel interface. shutdown — disables/enables the port channel. group Group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group” or “failover group”). Syntax group group_number port-channel number port-channel number To remove an existing LAG supergroup, use the no group group_number command.
interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group (LAG) containing 16 physical interfaces on the XML switch. Syntax interface port-channel channel-number To delete a Port Channel, use the no interface port-channel channelnumber command. Parameters channelnumber Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
minimum-links Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in “oper up” status for the LAG to be also in “oper up” status. Syntax Parameters minimum-links number number Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only.
more information, refer to the Port Channel chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Related Command group — groups two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group”). show interfaces port-channel — displays information on configured Port Channel groups. show config Display the current configuration of the selected LAG. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Interfaces The following describes the show interfaces port-channel command shown in the following example. Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAG’s status. In the Example, the status of the LAG’s LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed. Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address. Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”). Internet address...
Example (EtherScale) Dell#show interfaces port-channel Port-channel 1 is down, line protocol is down Hardware address is 00:1e:c9:f1:00:05, Current address is 00:1e:c9:f1:00:05 Interface index is 1107755009 Minimum number of links to bring Port-channel up is 1 Internet address is not set Mode of IP Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :lag1001ec9f10005 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto Members in this channel: ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counter
Field Description • Example (brief) In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated. Dell#show int po 1 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports 1 L3 down 00:00:00 Te 0/16 (Down) Dell# Related Commands show lacp — displays the LACP matrix. Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; either it is flapping or not coming up at all.
Usage Information The interface must be enabled to run the test or an error message is generated: Dell#tdr-cable-test gigabitethernet 5/2 %Error: Interface is disabled GI 5/2 Related Commands show tdr — displays the results of the TDR test. show tdr Display the TDR test results. Syntax Parameters show tdr interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
Pair B, Length: 92 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Short Pair C, Length: 93 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Open Pair D, Length: 0 (+/- 1) meters, Status: Impedance Mismatch Related Commands tdr-cable-test — runs the TDR test. UDP Broadcast The user datagram protocol (UDP) broadcast feature is a software-based method to forward low throughput (not to exceed 200 pps) IP/UDP broadcast traffic arriving on a physical or VLAN interface.
show ip udp-helper — displays the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces. ip udp-broadcast-address Configure an IP UDP address for broadcast. Syntax ip udp-broadcast-address address To delete the configuration, use the no ip udp-broadcast-address address command. Parameters address Enter an IP broadcast address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if) Command History Version 8.3.16.
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (config-if) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you configure the ip helper-address command and ip udp-helper udpport command, the behavior is that the UDP broadcast traffic with port numbers 67/68 is unicast relayed to the DHCP server per the ip helper-address configuration. This occurs regardless if the ip udp-helper udp-port command contains port numbers 67/68 or not.
ip udp-helper udp-port — enables the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of UDP ports. Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges This functionality is supported on the MXL platform. You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces, separated by commas, that you configure by using the interface range command.
22 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). arp To associate an IP address with a multicast MAC address in the switch when you configure multicast mode of the network load balancing (NLB), use the address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp ip-address multicast-mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. For multicast mode of NLB, to associate an IP address with a multicast MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP) by entering the arp ip-address multicast-mac-address command in Global configuration mode. This setting causes the multicast MAC address to be mapped to the cluster IP address for NLB mode of operation of the switch. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.
Usage Information Retries are 20 seconds apart. Related Commands show arp retries — displays the configured number of ARP retries. arp timeout Set the time interval for an ARP entry to remain in the ARP cache. Syntax Parameters arp timeout minutes minutes Enter the number of minutes. The range is from 0 to 35790. The default is 240 minutes. Defaults 240 minutes (4 hours) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ip ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. no-refresh (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM. Or use this option with interface or ip ip-address to specify which dynamic ARP entries you want to delete. NOTE: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this option with extreme caution.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To clear Layer 3 CAM inconsistencies, use this command. Related Commands show ip fib stack-unit — shows FIB entries. CAUTION: Executing this command causes traffic disruption. clear ip route Clear one or all routes in the routing table. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands clear ip route {* | ip-address mask} * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes.
debug arp View information on ARP transactions. Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value] To stop debugging ARP transactions, use the no debug arp command. Parameters interface count value Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#debug ip dhcp 00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0 00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2 00:12:26 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.
Parameters interface count value Command Modes Command History Example Usage Information (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information IPv4 Routing count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count then the count value. The range is from 1 to 65534. The default is Infinity. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0.
Field Description units) of this fragment (fragment offset) from the beginning of the original datagram. Example IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 54, sending TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994894, ack=606901739, win=8191 ACK PUSH IP: s=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), d=10.1.2.62, len 40, rcvd TCP src=0, dst=0, seq=0, ack=0, win=0 IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.206 (Ma 0/0), len 226, sending TCP src=23, dst=40869, seq=2112994896, ack=606901739, win=8192 ACK PUSH IP: s=10.1.2.216 (Ma 0/0), d=10.
Example (Error Messages) Dell#debug ip packet access-group test %Error: port operator GT not supported in access-list debug %Error: port operator LT not supported in access-list debug %Error: port operator RANGE not supported in access-list debug %Error: port operator NEQ not supported in access-list debug Dell#00:10:45: %RPM0-P:CP %IPMGR-3-DEBUG_IP_PACKET_ACL_AMBIGUOUS_EXP: Ambiguous rules not supported in access-list debug, access-list debugging is turned off Dell# ip address Assign a primary and second
Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip domain-list Configure names to complete unqualified host names. Syntax ip domain-list name To remove the name, use the no ip domain-list name command. Parameters name Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
ip domain-lookup To address resolution (that is, DNS), enable dynamic host-name. Syntax p domain-lookup To disable DNS lookup, use the no ip domain-lookup command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To fully enable DNS, also specify one or more domain name servers with the ip name-server command. The Dell Networking OS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN.
Usage Information You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command. To configure more than one domain name, configure the ip domain-list command up to six times. To enable dynamic resolution of hosts, use the following steps: • specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command • enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. Related Commands ip domain-list — configures additional names.
ip helper-address hop-count disable Disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent. Syntax ip helper-address hop-count disable To re-enable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hopcount disable command. Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ip icmp source-interface Enable the ICMP error and unreachable messages to be sent with the source interface IP address, such as the loopback address, instead of the hops of the preceding devices along the network path to be used for easy debugging and diagnosis of network disconnections and reachability problems with IPv4 packets. This functionality is supported on the MXL platform.
(ECMP) links, you cannot effectively and optimally use the traceroute and ping applications to examine the network reachablity and identify any broken links for diagnostic purposes. In such cases, if the reply that is obtained from each hop on the network path contains the IP address of the adjacent, neighboring interface from which the packet is received, it is difficult to employ the ping and traceroute utilites.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. You can enable the mechanism to configure the source or the originating interface from which the packet (the device that generates the ICMP error messages) is received by the switch to send the loopback address instead of its source IP address to be used in the ICMP unreachable messages and in the traceroute command output.
Usage Information To avoid denial of service (DOS) attacks, keep the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly low. ip name-server Enter up to six IPv4 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of their use. Syntax ip name-server ipv4-address [ipv4-address2...ipv4-address6] To remove a name server, use the no ip name-server ip-address command. Parameters ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address, in dotted decimal format, of the name server to be used.
Related Commands show ip interface — displays the interface routing status and configuration. ip route Assign a static route to the switch. Syntax ip route {destination mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address] | [distance] | [permanent] | tag tag-value}} To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask command. To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Using the following example of a static route: ip route 33.33.33.0 /24 tengigabitethernet 0/0 172.31.5.43 • The software installs a next hop that is not on the directly connected subnet but which recursively resolves to a next hop on the interface’s configured subnet. In the example, if gig 0/0 has an ip address on subnet 2.2.2.
Parameters <8-75> Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Usage Information Wait duration in seconds for the TCP connection to be established. Introduced on the MXL platform. You can configure the amount of time for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection. Using this capability, you can limit the wait times for TCP connection requests.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router. Syntax management route {{ipv4-address]/mask | {forwarding-routeraddress | managementethernet} To remove a static route, use the no management route{{ip-address mask | {ipv6-address prefix-length}}{forwarding-router-address | managementethernet} command. Parameters ipv4-address]/ mask Enter an IPv4 Address (A.B.C.
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Example Row Heading Description Address Displays the IP address of the ARP entry. Age(min) Displays the age (in minutes) of the ARP entry. Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry. Interface Displays the first two letters of the interfaces type and the slot/port associated with the ARP entry. VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry. CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.
Row Heading Description CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on. Example (Summary) #show arp summary Related Commands ip local-proxy-arp — enables/disables Layer 3 communication in secondary VLANs. TotalEntries Static Entries Dynamic Entries CPU ---------------------------------------------3 0 3 CP Dell switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries.
Field Description Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured). Name/address lookup... States if DNS is enabled on the system. • If DNS is enabled, the Name/Address lookup is domain service. • If DNS is not enabled, the Name/Address lookup is static mapping Name servers are... Lists the name servers, if configured. Host Displays the host name assigned to the IP address.
show ip cam stack-unit Display CAM entries. Syntax Parameters show ip cam stack-unit {0–5} [port-set {pipe-number} | {ipaddress mask [longer-prefixes]| detail | member-info | summary] 0–5 Enter the stack-unit ID from 0 to 5 pipe-number Enter the number of the Port-Pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0 ip-address mask [longerprefixes] (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route only. Enter the keywords longerprefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
Example Field Description C Displays the CPU bit. 1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the CP or RP2, depending on Egress port. V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN. Mac Addr Displays the next-hop router’s MAC address. Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface. For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion.
Example (Member-Info) Dell#show ip cam stack-unit 0 po 0 ecmp-group member-info detail Group Index Member Count Mac-Addr Port VLan ID Gateway ----------- ------------------------------- -----------------0 2 00:01:e8:8a:d6:58 Te 0/3 0 1.1.1.2 00:01:e8:8a:d6:58 Te 0/8 0 2.1.1.2 Dell# show ip fib stack-unit View all FIB entries.
Example Field Description VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed. EC Displays the number of ECMP paths. Dell#show ip fib stack-unit 0 Destination Gateway First-Hop Mac-Addr Port VId EC ---------------------------------------------------------------------10.10.10.10/32 Direct, Nu 0 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 BLK HOLE 0 0 Dell> Related Commands clear ip fib stack-unit — clear FIB entries on a specified stack-unit.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip interface command shown in the following example. Lines Description TenGigabitEthern et 0/0... Displays the interface’s type, slot/port, and physical and line protocol status. Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If an IP address is assigned, that address is displayed.
Example (Brief) Fields Description Method Displays “Manual” if the configuration is read from the saved configuration. Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively down). Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip management-route Destination ----------10.1.2.0/24 172.16.1.0/24 Dell# Gateway ------ManagementEthernet 0/0 10.1.2.4 State ----Connected Active show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the switch. Syntax show ip protocols Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information IPv4 Routing ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify a name of a device or the IP address of the device to view more detailed information about the route. mask (OPTIONAL) Specify the network mask of the route. Use this parameter with the IP address parameter. longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix.
Field Example Description • N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2 • E1 = OSPF external type 1 • E2 = OSPF external type 2 • i = IS-IS • L1 = IS-IS level-1 • L2 = IS-IS level-2 • IA = IS-IS inter-area • * = candidate default • > = non-active route • + = summary routes Destination Identifies the route’s destination IP address Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured.
Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.9, Gi 1/2 1/0 3d2h Dell> show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show ip route list prefix-list prefix-list • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the name of a configured prefix list. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip route summary View a table summarizing the IP routes in the switch. Syntax show ip route summary Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip route summary shown in the following example. Column Heading Description Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in the system.
show ip traffic View IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP traffic statistics. Syntax show ip traffic Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip traffic summary shown in the following example. Keyword Definition unknown protocol... No receiver for these packets. Counts packets whose protocol type field is not recognized by the system. not a gateway...
Keyword Definition ...socket full The applications buffer is full and the incoming packet are dropped. The F10 Monitoring MIB provides access to the following statistics. Example • IP Statistics: Bcast: Received: Object = f10BcastPktRecv, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.1 • IP Statistics: Bcast: Sent: Object = f10BcastPktSent, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.2 • IP Statistics: Mcast: Received: Object = f10McastPktRecv, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.
show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch. Syntax show tcp statistics Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 The following describes the show tcp statistics cp command shown in the following example. Field Description Rcvd: Displays the number and types of TCP packets received by the switch. 0 checksum error... IPv4 Routing Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Field Description Sent: Displays the total number of TCP packets sent and the number of urgent packets sent. 25 control packets... Displays the number of control packets sent and the number retransmitted. 11603 data packets... Displays the number of data packets sent. 24 data packets retransmitted Displays the number of data packets resent. 355 ack.. Displays the number of acknowledgement packets sent and the number of packet delayed. 0 window probe...
dropped in keepalive Dell# Related Commands IPv4 Routing show ip cam stack-unit — displays the CAM table.
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) 23 Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: • Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
Parameters name Enter the name for the transform set. ahauthentication Enter the keywords ah-authentication then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic. The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic. espauthentication esp-encryption Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) • md5 — Use Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication. • sha1 — Use Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1) authentication.
crypto ipsec policy Create a crypto policy used by ipsec. Syntax crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsec-manual To delete a crypto policy entry, use the no crypto ipsec policy name seqnum ipsec-manual command. Parameters name Enter the name for the crypto policy set. seq-num Enter the sequence number assigned to the crypto policy entry. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
match Match a sequence number to the transmission control protocol (TCP)/user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. Syntax match seq-num {tcp | udp} {ipv6 | ip} port-num dest-ip destport-num To remove the match filter for the crypto map, use the no match seq-num command. Parameters seq-num Enter the match command sequence number. The range is from 0 to 255. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter. udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter.
session-key Specify the session keys used in the crypto policy entry. Syntax session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah spi hex-key-string | esp spi encrypt hex-key-string auth hex-key-string To delete the session key information from the crypto policy, use the no session-key {inbound | outbound} {ah | esp} command. Parameters name Enter the name of the host to delete. Enter * to delete all host table entries. inbound Specify the inbound session key for IPSec.
Parameters Command Modes Command History Example name Enter the name of the transform set. EXEC Version 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show crypto ipsec transform-set Transform-Set Name Transform-Set refCnt AH Transform ESP Auth Transform ESP Encry Transform Dell# : dallas : 0 : : : 3des show crypto ipsec policy Display the crypto policy configuration.
89509d4b420a5b6789509d4b420a5b6789509d4 Match sequence Num Protocol type IP or IPv6 Source address Source mask Source port Destination address Destination mask Destination port source-interface name source-interface num : : : : : : : : : : : 0 tcp IPv6 a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 Match sequence Num Protocol type IP or IPv6 Source address Source mask Source port Destination address Destination mask Destination port source-interface name source-interface num : : : : : : : : : : : 1 tcp IPv6 a::1 /128 23 a::
transform-set Specify the transform set the crypto policy uses. Syntax transform-set transform-set-name To delete a transform set from the crypto policy, use the no transform-set transform-set-name command. Parameters transform-setname Enter the name for the crypto policy transform set. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG-CRYPTO-POLICY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) 24 IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell Networking MXL switch. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, refer to the Access Control Lists (ACL) chapter. Important Points to Remember • Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, refer to the cam-acl (Configuration) command. • Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. • Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Command Modes Command History Usage Information • IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 • L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 • L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startupconfig (write-mem or copy run start), then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.
ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic Defaults All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for CoPP for OSPFv3 on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent.
• Parameters Defaults 668 Use the no permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command ip-protocolnumber Enter an IPv6 protocol number. The range is from 0 to 255. icmp Enter the keyword icmp to filter internet Control Message Protocol version 6. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to filter any internet Protocol version 6. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to filter the Transmission Control protocol. udp Enter the keyword udp to filter the User Datagram Protocol.
Command Modes Command History ACCESS-LIST Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos : : : : : Current Settings(in block sizes) 2 2 4 2 3 Dell#show cam-acl Related Commands cam-acl — configures CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. show cam-acl-egress Show information on FP groups allocated for egress ACLs. Syntax show cam-acl-egress Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
25 IPv6 Basics This chapter describes IPv6 basic commands for the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ipv6 fib Clear (refresh) all forwarding information base (FIB) entries on a linecard or stack unit. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ipv6 fib linecard slot | stack-unit unit-number slot Enter the slot number to clear the FIB for a linecard. unit-number Enter the stack member number. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
clear ipv6 mld_host Clear the IPv6 MLD host counters and reset the elapsed time. Syntax clear ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 address autoconfig Configure IPv6 address auto-configuration for the management interface. Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig To disable the address autoconfig operation on the management interface, use the no ipv6 address autoconfig command.
ipv6 address Configure an IPv6 address to an interface. Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} To remove the IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
ipv6 address eui64 Configure IPv6 EUI64 address configuration on the interface. Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} eui64 To disable IPv6 EUI64 address autoconfiguration, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} eui64 command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 prefix in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 flowlabel-zero Configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero. Syntax ipv6 flowlabel-zero To disable the 0 from being set in the field and allow the rotocol operations to fill the field, use the no ipv6 flowlabel-zero command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ipv6 name-server Enter up to six IPv6 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of their use. Syntax ipv6 name-server ipv6-address [ipv6-address2... ipv6-address6] To remove a name server, use the no ipv6 name—server ipv6–address command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the name server to be used. NOTE: The :: notation specifics successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. ipv6-address2...
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 nd dns-server Configures Recursive DNS Server (RDNSS) addresses to be distributed via IPv6 router advertisements to an IPv6 device. Syntax ipv6 nd dns-server {ipv6-RDNSS-address} {lifetime | infinite} To remove the IPv6 RDSS configuration, use no ipv6 nd dns-server {ipv6RDNSS-address} {lifetime | infinite} Parameters ipv6-RDNSSaddress Enter the IPv6 Recursive DNS Server’s (RDNSS) address.
ipv6 nd prefix Specify which IPv6 prefixes are included in Neighbor Advertisements. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 680 ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-prefix | prefix-length | default} [noadvertise] | [no-autoconfig] [no-rtr-address] [off-link] [lifetime {valid | infinite} {preferred | infinite}] ipv6-prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix. prefix-length Enter the prefix then the prefix length. The length range is from 0 to 128.
ipv6 route Establish a static IPv6 route. Syntax ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {ipv6-address | interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] To remove the IPv6 route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-address prefixlength {ipv6-address | interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128.
tag value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag then a tag value number. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify that the route is not to be removed, even if the interface assigned to that route goes down. NOTE: If you disable the interface with an IPv6 address associated with the keyword permanent, the route disappears from the routing table. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
Related Commands show ipv6 route — views the IPv6 configured routes. ipv6 unicast-routing Enable IPv6 Unicast routing. Syntax ipv6 unicast-routing To disable unicast routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Because this command is enabled by default, it does not appear in the running configuration.
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM. index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more specific prefixes. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
show ipv6 fib stack-unit View all FIB entries. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary | ipv6-address] slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit. The range is from 0 to 11. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more specific prefixes. The range is from /0 to /128.
show ipv6 interface Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). If necessary, use the ipv6 address command to assign an IPv6 address to the Management port.
Dell# Example (Brief) Example (tunnel) Dell#show ipv6 interface brief TenGigabitEthernet 0/44 fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3883 4001:2::3/64 ManagementEthernet 0/0 fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3883 33::1/64 Tunnel 45 fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3883 333::1/64 Port-channel 23 fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3883 110::1/64 Vlan 12 fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3883 400::1/64 Dell# [up/up] [up/up] [up/up] [up/up] [up/up] Dell#show ipv6 interface tunnel 1 Tunnel 1 is up, line protocol is up IPV6 is enabled Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe04:62c4 Glo
Example Field Description Valid MLD Packets The total number of packets received and sent from the last time the elapsed time was cleared. Reports The total number of reports (queries and unsolicited reports generated from joins or leaves) that have been received or sent. Leaves The number of Multicast leaves that have been sent. MLDv1 queries The number of MLDv1 queries that have been received. MLDv2 queries The number of MLDv2 queries that have been received.
list (OPTIONAL) View the IPv6 prefix list. ospf (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 OSPF routes. rip (OPTIONAL) View information for all IPv6 RIP routes. static (OPTIONAL) View only routes configured by the ipv6 route command. summary (OPTIONAL) View a brief list of the configured IPv6 routes. Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) The following describes the show ipv6 route command shown in the following examples.
Example Field Description Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured. Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric. Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
Usage Information When you configure trust IPv6 diffserv, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command. Trust diffserv (IPv4) can co-exist with trust ipv6-diffserv in an Input Policy Map.
26 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on Dell Networking platforms. This chapter includes the following sections: • IPv6 BGP Commands • IPv6 MBGP Commands IPv6 BGP Commands BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths.
Usage Information After this command is executed, all subsequent commands apply to this address family. You can exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast (the default) family by entering the exit command and returning to the Router BGP context. aggregate-address Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate if routes within the aggregate are constantly changing as the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH. In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not suppress; in other words, they are allowed.
bgp bestpath as-path ignore Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore To return to the default, use the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bgp bestpath med missing-as-best During path selection, indicate a preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over those paths with an advertised MED attribute. Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-asbest command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector. Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID. number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation. The system accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute.
bgp dampening Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters. Syntax Parameters bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes.
bgp default local-preference Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers. Syntax bgp default local-preference value To return to the default value, use the no bgp default local-preference command. Parameters value Defaults 100 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes.
Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors — displays IPv6 routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors. show ip protocols — views information on routing protocols. bgp fast-external-fallover Enable the fast external fallover feature, which immediately resets the BGP session if a link to a directly connected external peer fails. Syntax bgp fast-external-fallover To disable fast external fallover, use the no bgp fast-external-fallover command. Defaults Enabled.
When creating Confederations, all the routers in the Confederation must be 4- or 2-byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. Where the 2-Byte format is from 1 to 65535, the 4-Byte format is from 1 to 4294967295. Both formats are accepted, and the advertisements reflect the entered format. For more information about using the 2- or 4-Byte format, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
bgp log-neighbor-changes Enable logging of BGP neighbor resets. Syntax bgp log-neighbor-changes To disable logging, use the no bgp log-neighbor-changes command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output. Related Commands show config — views the current configuration.
bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP. Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution using BGP learned routes.
BGP policies, containing regular expressions to match as-path and communities, tend to use a lot of CPU processing time, which in turn affects the BGP routing convergence. Additionally, the show bgp commands, which are filtered through regular expressions, use up CPU cycles particularly with large databases. The Regex Engine Performance Enhancement feature optimizes the CPU usage by caching and reusing regular expression evaluation results.
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgpv6_af) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router replays and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Syntax Parameters capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000 100-10240000 0 Defaults 40960000 bytes Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a size for the capture buffer. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
out Command Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp as-number Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
out Command Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6-address Reset BGP sessions specific to an IPv6 address. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name peer-groupname Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
clear ip bgp ipv6 flap-statistics Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address | filter-list as-path-name | regexp regular-expression] ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6neighbor-addr | peer-group name} ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] * Clear and reapply policies for all BGP sessions. as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte), or from 0.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peer-groupname Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peer-groupname Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information peer-group peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive messages. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive messages. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates.
default-metric Allows you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters number Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
distance bgp Configure three administrative distances for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information externaldistance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 20. internaldistance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
Parameters ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes. ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes. number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1. Defaults 1 Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information By default, when you create a neighbor/peer group configuration in the Router BGP context, it is enabled for the IPv6/Unicast AFI/SAFI. By using activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer group is enabled for AFI/SAFI. neighbor advertisement-interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group.
Parameters ip-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group. number Enter a number of times to allow this neighbor ID to use the AS path. The range is from 1 to 10. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.
Usage Information If you apply a route map to a BGP peer or neighbor with the neighbor defaultoriginate command configured, the software does not apply the set filters in the route map to that BGP peer or neighbor. neighbor description Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group). Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} description text To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} description text command.
peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group. prefix-listname Enter the name of an established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes). in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic. out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command does not install default routes of the multihop peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection. neighbor fall-over Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the peer group. in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound BGP routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.
Defaults threshold = 75 Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you configure the neighbor maximum-prefix command and the neighbor receives more prefixes than allowed by the neighbor maximum-prefix command configuration, the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command displays (prfxd) in the State/PfxRcd column for that neighbor.
neighbor next-hop-self Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for IBGP). Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} next-hop-self command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can assign up to 64 peers to one peer group. When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
Command Modes Command History ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When a peer group is created, it is disabled (shut mode). Related Commands neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns routers to a peer group. neighbor remote-as — assigns a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor shutdown — disables a peer or peer group.
neighbor remote-as Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} remote-as number command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.
peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers. Defaults Disabled (that is, the private AS number are not removed). Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Applies to external border gateway protocol (EBGP) neighbors only. If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route map are permitted. If you identify a peer group by name, the peers in that peer group inherit the characteristics in the Route map used in this command.
neighbor send-community Send a COMMUNITY attribute to a BGP neighbor or peer group. A COMMUNITY attribute indicates that all routes with that attribute belong to the same community grouping. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} send-community To disable sending a COMMUNITY attribute, use the no neighbor {ipv6address | peer-group-name} send-community command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Usage Information Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shutdown, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command to confirm its status. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary — displays the current BGP configuration.
neighbor subnet Enable passive peering so that the members of the peer group are dynamic. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask To remove passive peering, use the no neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask command. Parameters subnet-number Enter a subnet number in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) as the allowable range of addresses included in the Peer group. To allow all addresses, enter 0::0/0. mask Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x).
Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information • keepalive = 60 seconds • holdtime = 180 seconds ROUTER BGP Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with the timers bgp command.
Usage Information Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected internal BGP sessions. neighbor weight Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} weight weight To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} weight weight command.
Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Though the system does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/ sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route. redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
redistribute isis Redistribute IS-IS routes into BGP. Syntax redistribute isis [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] To stop redistribution of IS-IS routes, use the no redistribute isis command. Parameters level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] (OPTIONAL) Enter the type (level) of routes to redistribute. metric (OPTIONAL) Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information.
match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only. match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPFv3 internal routes only. route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured.
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Related Command show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv6-address ipv6-address • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of a BGP neighbor. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6) — enables capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet.
neighbor 4000::33 no shutdown neighbor 4000::60 remote-as 18508 neighbor 4000::60 no shutdown neighbor 9000::1:2 remote-as 640 no neighbor 9000::1:2 activate neighbor 9000::1:2 no shutdown ! Dell# show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the current BGP information.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community View information on all routes with community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list View routes that are affected by a specific community list. Syntax Paramters Command Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name [exact-match] communitylist-name Enter the name of a configured IP community list. exact-match (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact-match to display only for an exact match of the communities. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list [list name] list name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefixlength] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Command Modes Command History • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Displays information on IPv6 unicast routes exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors command shown in the Example below. Lines Beginning With Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one.
Example Lines Beginning With Description For address family: Displays IPv6 Unicast as the address family. BGP table version Displays which version of the primary BGP routing table the router and the neighbor are using. Prefixes accepted Displays the number of network prefixes accepted by the router and the amount of memory used to process those prefixes. Prefixes advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number rejected, and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table.
2 accepted prefixes consume 32 bytes Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:39, due to Closed by neighbor Notification History 'OPEN error/Bad AS' Sent : 0 Recv: 1 Local host: 5ffe:10::4, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 5ffe:10::3, Foreign port: 35470 Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 BGP neighbor is 5ffe:11::3, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remo
Parameters Command Modes Command History Example peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a peer group to view information about that peer group only. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view peer-groupspecific information for the IPv6 address family. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view status information of the peers in that peer group. The output is the same as that found in the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 55.55.55.
show ip bgp paths View all the BGP path attributes in the BGP database. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp paths [regexp regular-expression] regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences).
show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database. Syntax show ip bgp paths community Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp paths extcommunity View all unique extended community information in the BGP database. Syntax show ip bgp paths extcommunity Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. timers bgp Allows you to adjust the BGP network timers for all neighbors.
IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). The Dell Networking MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. address family This command changes the context to subsequent address family identifier (SAFI). Syntax address family ipv6 unicast To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv6 unicast command.
advertise-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map then the name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route. as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords as-set to generate path attribute information and include it in the aggregate. AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route.
bgp dampening Enable MBGP route dampening. Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening Clear information on route dampening. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ip bgp dampening ipv6 unicast [network network-mask] network (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 network address in x:x:x:x::x format. network-mask If you enter the network address, next enter the network mask, from 0 to 128. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History • [ ] (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns. • ^ (caret) matches the beginning of the input string. (If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified.) • $ (dollar sign) matches the end of the output string. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening View information on routes being dampened.
Command Modes Command History updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast updates View information about BGP updates.
distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information externaldistance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a neighbor external to the AS. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 20. internaldistance Enter a number to assign to routes learned from a router within the AS.
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname Identify a peer group by name. activate Enter the keyword activate to enable the identified neighbor or peer group in the new AFI/SAFI. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Command Modes Command History seconds = 30 seconds (external peers) ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name] To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} default-originate command.
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname Enter the name of the peer group. prefix-listname Enter the name of an established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes). in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic. out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic. Defaults Not configured.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received.
neighbor next-hop-self Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} next-hop-self command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-groupname (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. Defaults Disabled.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor route-map Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} route-map map-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-reflectorclient To indicate that the neighbor is not a route reflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} route-reflector-client command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information If you do not configure the default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is “0”. To redistribute the default route (0::0/0), configure the neighbor defaultoriginate command. Related Commands neighbor default-originate — injects the default route. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the current BGP information.
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community View information on all routes with community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list View routes that are affected by a specific community list. Syntax Paramters Command Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name communitylist-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the name of a configured IP community list. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
NdAuto 1 : NdEqCost 1 : NdSync 0 : NdDefOrg 0 NdV6ListSoc 14 NdDefDid 0 : NdConfedId 0 : NdMedConfed 0 : NdMedMissVal -1 : NdIgnrIllId 0 : NdRRC2C 1 : NdClstId 33686273 : NdPaTblP 0x41a19088 NdASPTblP 0x41a19090 : NdCommTblP 0x41a19098 : NhOptTransTblP 0x41a190a0 : NdRRClsTblP 0x41a190a8 NdPktPA 0 : NdLocCBP 0x41a6f000 : NdTmpPAP 0x419efc80 : NdTmpASPAP 0x41a25000 : NdTmpCommP 0x41a25800 NdTmpRRClP 0x41a4b000 : NdTmpOptP 0x41a4b800 : NdTmpNHP : NdOrigPAP 0 NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x4
filter-list aspath-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH ACL. regexp regularexpression Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match: • . = (period) any single character (including a white space). • * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences). • ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences).
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Allows you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Usage Information 780 The following describes the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors command shown in the Example below. Lines Beginning With Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise, the link is external.
Example Lines Beginning With Description Prefixes advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number rejected, and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table. Connections established Displays the number of TCP connections established and dropped between the two peers to exchange BGP information. Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset. Also states if the peer resets the peering session.
Foreign host: 5ffe:10::3, Foreign port: 35470 Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 BGP neighbor is 5ffe:11::3, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 5.5.5.
Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns a peer to a peer-group. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections. Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Field Description AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent. TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor. InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed. OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
iSCSI Optimization 27 Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic. To configure and verify the iSCSI optimization feature, use the following Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands. advertise dcbx-app-tlv Configure DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements. Syntax advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi To disable DCBX iSCSI TLV advertisements, use the no advertise dcbx-apptlv iscsi command. Defaults Disabled.
Defaults 10 minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi cos Set the QoS policy that is applied to the iSCSI flows. Syntax iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]} To disable the QoS policy, use the no iscsi cos dscp command.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi enable Globally enable iSCSI optimization. Syntax iscsi enable To disable iSCSI optimization, use the no iscsi enable command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword enable to enable the iSCSI optimization feature.
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi profile-compellant Configure the auto-detection of Dell Compellent arrays on a port. Syntax iscsi profile-compellent Defaults Dell Compellent disk arrays are not detected. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands. When you use the no iscsi target port command and the TCP port you wish to delete is one bound to a specific IP address, the IP address value must be included in the command. show iscsi Display the currently configured iSCSI settings.
show iscsi session Display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. Syntax show iscsi session Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show isci session Session 0: -----------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic: 0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.
Example Related Commands Dell# show isci session detailed Session 0 : --------------------------------------------------Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1 Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.ixload:initiator-iscsi-2c Up Time:00:00:01:28(DD:HH:MM:SS) Time for aging out:00:00:09:34(DD:HH:MM:SS) ISID:806978696102 Initiator Initiator Target Target Connection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10.10.0.44 33345 10.10.0.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) 28 The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol for IPv4 and IPv6 is supported on the on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains, called areas.
advertise Leak routes between levels (distribute IP prefixes between Level 1 and Level 2 and vice versa). Syntax advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-into-level1} prefixlist-name To return to the default, use the no advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-into-level1}[prefix-list-name] command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information level1-intolevel2 Enter the keywords level1-into-level2 to advertise Level 1 routes into Level 2 LSPs. This setting is the default.
password Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a 1 to 16-character length alphanumeric string to prevent unauthorized access or incorrect routing information corrupting the link state database. The password is processed as plain text, which only provides limited security. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
clear isis Restart the IS-IS process. All IS-IS data is cleared. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear isis [tag] {* | database | traffic} tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information.
debug isis Enable debugging for all IS-IS operations. Syntax debug isis To disable debugging of IS-IS, use the no debug isis command. Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Entering debug isis enables all debugging parameters. To display all debugging information in one output, use this command. To turn off debugging, you normally enter separate no forms of each command.
debug isis local-updates To debug IS-IS local update packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. Syntax debug isis local-updates [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis local-updates [interface] command. Parameters Command Modes Command History interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis spf-triggers Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging purposes. Syntax debug isis spf-triggers To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis spf-triggers command. Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
default-information originate Generates a default route into an IS-IS routing domain and controls the distribution of default information. Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [routemap map-name] To disable the generation of a default route into the specified IS-IS routing domain, use the no default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to have the default route always advertised.
description Enter a description of the IS-IS routing protocol. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a description to identify the IS-IS protocol (80 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router isis — Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Usage Information The administrative distance indicates the trust value of incoming packets. A low administrative distance indicates a high trust rate. A high value indicates a lower trust rate. For example, a weight of 255 is interpreted that the routing information source is not trustworthy and should be ignored. distribute-list in Filter network prefixes received in updates.
distribute-list out Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | bgp as number | ospf process-id | rip | static] To return to the default values, use the no distribute-list prefix-listname out [bgp as number connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information Related Commands prefix-listname Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates.
To return to the default, use the no distribute-list redistributedoverride in command. Defaults none Command Modes • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you execute this command, IS-IS does not download the route to the routing table if the same route was redistributed into IS-IS routing protocol on the same router.
graceful-restart ietf Enable graceful restart on an IS-IS router. Syntax graceful-restart ietf To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart ietf command. Parameters ietf Enter ietf to enable graceful restart on the IS-IS router. Defaults Graceful restart disabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Every graceful restart enabled router’s HELLO PDUs includes a restart TLV.
graceful-restart t1 Set the graceful restart wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated. This wait time is the interval before the system sends a restart request (an IIH with RR bit set in Restart TLV) until the CSNP is received from the helping router. Syntax graceful-restart t1 {interval seconds | retry-times value} To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t1 command. Parameters interval Enter the keyword interval to set the wait time.
graceful-restart t3 Configure the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. Syntax graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual} seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t3 command. Parameters adjacency Enter the keyword adjacency so that the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if you have configured this option. manual Enter the keyword manual to specify a time value that the restarting router uses.
Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the graceful restart time in seconds. The range is from 5 to 300 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. graceful-restart t3 — configures the overall wait time before graceful restart completes.
hostname dynamic Enables dynamic learning of hostnames from routers in the domain and allows the routers to advertise the hostname in LSPs. Syntax hostname dynamic To disable this command, use the no hostname dynamic command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Turn ON or OFF hello padding on an interface basis. Usage Information To build name-to-systemID mapping tables through the protocol, use this command.
ip router isis Configure IS-IS routing processes on an interface and attach an area tag name to the routing process. Syntax ip router isis [tag] To disable IS-IS on an interface, use the no ip router isis [tag] command. Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) The tag you specify identifies a specific area routing process. If you do not specify a tag, a null tag is assigned. Defaults No processes are configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 9.2(0.
To establish adjacencies and establish dynamic routing, enable routing on one or more interfaces. You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time. Related Commands • net — configures an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for the routing process. • is-type — assigns a type for a given area. isis circuit-type Configure the adjacency type on interfaces.
isis csnp-interval Configure the IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval on an interface. Syntax isis csnp-interval seconds [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis csnp-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters seconds Interval of transmission time between CSNPs on multiaccess networks for the designated intermediate system. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 10.
Defaults seconds = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system. To maintain database synchronization, the designated routers send CSNPs. You can configure Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals independently.
isis hello padding Turn ON or OFF padding of hello PDUs from INTERFACE mode. Syntax isis hello padding To return to the default, use the no isis hello padding command. Defaults Padding of hello PDUs is enabled (ON). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Hello PDUs are “padded” only when both the global and interface padding options are ON. Turning either one OFF disables padding for the corresponding interface.
Usage Information Dell Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics. isis metric Assign a metric to an interface. Syntax isis metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2] command.
Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. isis password Configure an authentication password for an interface. Syntax isis password [hmac-md5] password [level-1 | level-2] To delete a password, use the no isis password [password] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES.
This password provides limited security as it is processed as plain text. isis priority Set the priority of the designated router you select. Syntax isis priority value [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis priority [value] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters value This value sets the router priority. The higher the value, the higher the priority. The range is from 0 to 127. The default is 64. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Specify the priority for Level 1.
Parameters level-1 Allows a router to act as a Level 1 router. level-1-2 Allows a router to act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 router. This setting is the default. level-2-only Allows a router to act as a Level 2 router. Defaults level-1-2 Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The IS-IS protocol automatically determines area boundaries and are able to keep Level 1 and Level 2 routing separate.
To restore default values, use the no lsp-gen-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command. Parameters level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to apply the configuration to generation of Level-1 LSPs. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to apply the configuration to generation of Level-2 LSPs. interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between LSP generations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds.
To return to the default values, use the no lsp-mtu command. Parameters size Defaults 1497 bytes. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) The maximum LSP size, in bytes. The range is from 128 to 1497 for Non-Jumbo mode and from 128 to 9195 for Jumbo mode. The default is 1497. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The link MTU and the LSP MTU size must be the same.
state database corruption can persist at the cost of increased link utilization. A higher value reduces the link utilization the flooding of refreshed packets causes. Related Commands max-lsp-lifetime — sets the maximum interval that LSPs persist without being refreshed. max-area-addresses Configure manual area addresses. Syntax max-area-addresses number To return to the default values, use the no max-area-addresses command.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER ISIS Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command. The maximum LSP lifetime must always be greater than the LSP refresh interval. The seconds parameter enables the router to keep LSPs for the specified length of time. If the value is higher, the overhead is reduced on slower-speed links. Related Commands lsp-refresh-interval — sets the link-state packet (LSP) refresh interval.
Parameters narrow Allows you to generate and accept old-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 63. transition Allows you to generate both old-style and new-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 63. wide Allows you to generate and accept only new-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 16777215. level-1 Enables the metric style on Level 1. level-2 Enables the metric style on Level 2. Defaults narrow; if no Level is specified, Level-1 and Level-2 are configured.
net To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process, use this mandatory command. If you did not configure a NET, the IS-IS process does not start. Syntax net network-entity-title To remove a net, use the no net network-entity-title command. Parameters networkentity-title Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The first 1 to 13 bytes identify the area address.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Although the passive interface does not send nor receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in the IS-IS updates sent using other interfaces. redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain.
route-map map-name Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information (OPTIONAL) If you do not enter the route-map argument, all routes are redistributed. If a map-name value is not specified, no routers are imported. • metric metric-value = 0 • metric-type= internal; level-2 • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To redistribute a default route (0.0.0.
To return to the default values, use the no redistribute bgp command with the appropriate parameters. Parameters AS number Enter a number that corresponds to the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65355. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into ISIS Level 1 routes only. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into ISIS Level 1 and Level 2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into ISIS as Level 2 routes only.
route-map rmap-isis-to-bgp redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [match {internal | external}] [metric metric-value] [metrictype {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [match {internal | external}] [metric metric-value][metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] command.
If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you specify a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes are imported. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information Refer to Parameters. • • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric-style command.
Related Commands • ip router isis — configures IS-IS routing processes for IP on interfaces and attaches an area designator to the routing process. • net — configures an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process. • is-type — assigns a type for a given area. set-overload-bit To set the overload bit in its non-pseudonode LSPs, configure the router. This setting prevents other routers from using it as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations.
clns host ISIS 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 log-adjacency-changes net 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 ! address-family ipv6 unicast maximum-paths 16 multi-topology transition set-overload-bit spf-interval level-1 100 15 20 spf-interval level-2 120 20 25 exit-address-family Example (AddressFamily_IPv6) The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode.
Usage Information The following describes the show isis database command shown in the following example. Field Description IS-IS Level-1/ Level-2 Link State Database Displays the IS-IS link state database for Level 1 or Level 2. LSPID Displays the LSP identifier. The first six octets are the System ID of the originating router. The first six octets are the System ID of the originating router. The next octet is the pseudonode ID. If this byte is not zero, the LSP describes system links.
Example The bold sections identify that MultiTopology IS-IS is enabled. Dell#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x00000006 0xCF43 580 0/0/0 ! Dell#show isis database detail ISIS.00-00 IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.
show isis graceful-restart detail Display detailed IS-IS graceful restart related settings. Syntax show isis graceful-restart detail Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show isis interface Display detailed IS-IS interface status and configuration information. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example 834 show isis interface [interface] interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
show isis neighbors Display information about neighboring (adjacent) routers. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show isis neighbors [level-1 | level-2] [detail] [interface] level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 1 IS-IS neighbors. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 2 IS-IS neighbors. detail (OPTIONAL) Displays detailed information about neighbors.
Example Field Description Uptime Displays the interfaces uptime. Circuit Id The neighbor’s interpretation of the designated router for the interface. The bold sections below identify that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled. Dell#show isis neighbors System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:01 TEST.02 ! Dell#show isis neighbors detail System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:04 TEST.02 Area Address(es): 49.
Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none Multi Topology Routing is enabled in transition mode. Dell# show isis traffic This command allows you to display IS-IS traffic interface information. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show isis traffic [interface] interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
Example Item Description Level-1/Level-2 LSPs PSNPs (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of PSNP LPSs sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 DR Elections Displays the number of times designated router elections ran. Level-1/Level-2 SPF Calculations Displays the number of shortest path first calculations. LSP checksum errors received Displays the number of checksum errors LSPs received. LSP authentication failures Displays the number of LSP authentication failures.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to apply the configuration to Level-2 SPF calculations. interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. initial_wait_inte rval seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.
29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This chapter contains commands for Dell Networks’s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as port-channels in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: For static LAG commands, refer to the Interfaces chapter), based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug the LACP event information. pdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword pdu to debug the LACP Protocol Data Unit information. interface in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority. Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priorityvalue command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority.
port-channel mode Configure the LACP port channel mode. Syntax Parameters port-channel number mode [active] [passive] [off] number Enter the keywords number then a number. active Enter the keyword active to set the mode to the active state. NOTE: LACP modes are defined in Usage Information. passive Enter the keyword passive to set the mode to the passive state. NOTE: LACP modes are defined in Usage Information. off Enter the keyword off to set the mode to the off state.
port-channel-protocol lacp Enable LACP on any LAN port. Syntax port-channel-protocol lacp To disable LACP on a LAN port, use the no port-channel-protocol lacp command. Command Modes Command History Example INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example (PortChannelNumber) Dell#show lacp Port-channel 1 Actor System Partner System Key 1 1 admin up, oper up, ID:Priority 32768, ID:Priority 32768, Actor Admin Key mode lacp Address 0001.e800.a12b Address 0001.e801.
30 Layer 2 This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. This chapter contains: • MAC Addressing Commands MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. clear mac-address-table Clear the MAC address table. Syntax Parameters clear mac-address-table dynamic {address mac-address | all | interface interface | vlan vlan-id} address macaddress Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table. Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds To delete the configured aging time, use the no mac-address-table agingtime seconds command.
• vlan vlan-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to allow aging of MACs even though a learning limit is configured. no-stationmove (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords no-station-move to disallow a station move (associate the learned MAC address with the most recently accessed port) on learned MAC addresses. station-move (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords station-move to allow a station move on learned MAC addresses.
show mac learning-limit — displays MAC learning-limit configuration. mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation Configure an action for a MAC address learning-limit violation. Syntax mac learning-limit learn-limit-violation {log | shutdown} To return to the default, use the no mac learning-limit learn-limitviolation {log | shutdown} command. Parameters log Enter the keyword log to generate a syslog message on a learning-limit violation.
shutdownoffending Enter the keywords shutdown-offending to shut down the offending interface and generate a syslog message. shutdownoriginal Enter the keywords shutdown-original to shut down the original interface and generate a syslog message. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
port-set portpipe (REQUIRED) Enter the keywords port-set then a Port-Pipe number to select the Port-Pipe for which to gather information. The range is 0. address macaddr (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address. dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to display only those MAC addresses learned dynamically by the switch.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Layer 2 static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to display only those MAC addresses specifically configured on the switch. Optionally, you can also add one of these combinations: address/mac-address, interface/interface, or vlan vlan-id. address macaddress (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword address then a MAC address in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format to display information on that MAC address.
Column Heading Description Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information. The following abbreviations describe the interface types: State Example Usage Information • gi — Gigabit Ethernet then a slot/port. • po — Port Channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 255 for TeraScale. • so —SONET then a slot/port. • te — 10 Gigabit Ethernet then a slot/port. Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).
Line Beginning With Description Dynamic Address... Lists the number of dynamically learned MAC addresses. Static Address... Lists the number of user-defined MAC addresses. Total MAC... Lists the total number of MAC addresses the switch uses. Example (Count) Dell#show mac-address-table count MAC Entries for all vlans : Dynamic Address Count : Static Address (User-defined) Count : Total MAC Addresses in Use: Dell# Related Commands show mac-address-table aging-time — displays MAC aging time.
show mac learning-limit Display MAC address learning limits set for various interfaces. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show mac learning-limit [violate-action] [detail] [interface interface] violate-action (OPTIONALY) Enter the keywords violate-action to display the MAC learning limit violation status. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display the MAC learning limit in detail.
description Add a description about the selected VLAN. Syntax Parameters description description description Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a text string description to identify the VLAN (80 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show vlan — displays the VLAN configuration. default vlan-id Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN.
default-vlan disable Disable the default VLAN so that all switchports are placed in the Null VLAN until they are explicitly configured as a member of another VLAN. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The no default vlan disable command is not listed in the runningconfiguration, but when the default VLAN is disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration.
show config Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 1 description a no ip address mtu 2500 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-100)# show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
Usage Information The following describes the show vlan command shown in the following example. Column Heading Description (Column 1 — no heading) • asterisk symbol (*) = Default VLAN • G = GVRP VLAN • P = primary VLAN C = community VLAN I = isolated VLAN • O = OpenFlow NUM Displays existing VLAN IDs. Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word Active for active VLANs.
* 20 Active 1002 Active Dell# U Te 0/3,5,13,53-56 T Te 0/3,13,55-56 Example (VLAN ID) Dell# show vlan id 40 Example (Brief) Dell#show vlan brief VLAN Name STG MAC Aging IP Address ---- -----------------------------1 0 0 unassigned 2 0 0 unassigned 20 0 0 unassigned 1002 0 0 unassigned Dell# Example (Name) Dellconf)#interface vlan 222 Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#name test Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C - C
Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN. In the Default VLAN, you cannot use the no untagged interface command. To remove an untagged interface from all VLANs, including the Default VLAN, enter INTERFACE mode and use the no switchport command. Related Commands interface vlan — configures a VLAN.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 31 Link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
Version 8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) — enables LLDP globally. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise dot3-tlv Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value). Syntax advertise dot3-tlv {max-frame-size} To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-framesize} command.
Parameters systemcapabilities Enter the keywords system-capabilities to advertise the system capabilities TLVs to the LLDP peer. systemdescription Enter the keywords system-description to advertise the system description TLVs to the LLDP peer. system-name Enter the keywords system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to the LLDP peer. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
clear lldp neighbors Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interface. Syntax Parameters clear lldp neighbors {interface} interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Version 9.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets coming in or going out. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information. tx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tx to display transmit-only packet information. rx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rx to display receive-only packet information.
show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. hello Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer. Syntax hello seconds To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command. Parameters seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Version 9.
Version 8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) — enables LLDP globally. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. multiplier Set the number of consecutive misses before LLDP declares the interface dead. Syntax multiplier integer To return to the default, use the no multiplier integer command. Parameters integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead. The range is from 2 to 10.
protocol lldp (Interface) Enter the LLDP protocol in INTERFACE mode. Syntax [no] protocol lldp To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from Interface mode. Defaults LLDP is not enabled on the interface. Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Before LLDP can be configured on an interface, it must be enabled globally from CONFIGURATION mode.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and Dead Interval.
Example Dell#show running-config lldp ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities systemdescription hello 15 multiplier 3 no disable Dell# LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands. The LLDP-MED commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV advertisement commands.
Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults Unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med location-identification To advertise a location identifier, configure the system.
show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med power-via-mdi To advertise the Extended Power via MDI TLV, configure the system. Syntax advertise med power-via-mdi To return to the default, use the no advertise med power-via-mdi command. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Advertise the Extended Power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med streaming-video To advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video, configure the system. This command does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP.
show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration.
Microsoft Network Load Balancing 32 This functionality is supported on the MXL platforms. Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
response with MAC-s4 is received as the last one). The interface associated with server, S4, is added to the ARP table. • With NLB feature enabled, after learning the NLB ARP entry, all the subsequent traffic is flooded on all ports in VLAN1. With NLB, the data frame is forwarded to all the servers for them to perform load-balancing. NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm.
learned, traffic is forwarded to only one server rather than the entire cluster, and failover and balancing are not preserved. To preserve failover and balancing, the switch forwards the traffic destined for the server cluster to all member ports in the VLAN connected to the cluster. To ensure that this happens, you must configure the ip vlan-flooding command on the Dell switch at the time that the Microsoft cluster is configured.
NOTE: Use this option if you want multicast functionality in an L2 VLAN without IGMP protocols. output interface output-range interface vlan vlan-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.3(0.0) For a multicast MAC address, enter the keyword output then one of the following interfaces for which traffic is forwarded: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
ip vlan-flooding Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports. Syntax ip vlan-flooding To disable, use the no ip vlan-flooding command. Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Default Disabled Usage Information By default this command is disabled. There might be some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA different from MAC information inside the ARP packet.
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) 33 Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. clear ip msdp peer Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all the peer statistics.
local Enter the keyword local to clear out local PIM advertised entries. It applies the redistribute filter (if present) while adding the local PIM SA entries to the SA cache. Defaults Without any options, this command clears the entire source-active cache. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters event peer address Enter the keyword event then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). packet peer address Enter the keyword packet then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). pim Enter the keyword pim to debug advertisement from PIM. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) list name Enter the keywords list name and specify a standard access list that contains the RP address that should be treated as the default peer. If no access list is specified, then all SAs from the peer are accepted. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. An MSDP mesh group is a mechanism for reducing SA flooding, typically in an intra-domain setting. When some subset of a domain’s MSDP speakers are fully meshed, they can be configured into a mesh-group.
ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer. Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [salimit number] To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface] [description name] [sa-limit number] command. Parameters peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Related Commands ip msdp sa-limit — configures the MSDP SA Limit. clear ip msdp peer — clears the MSDP peer. show ip msdp — displays the MSDP information. ip msdp redistribute Filter local PIM SA entries in the SA cache. SAs which the ACL denies time out and are not refreshed. Until they time out, they continue to reside in the MSDP SA cache. Syntax Parameters ip msdp redistribute [list acl-name] list acl-name Defaults Not configured.
peer-address Enter the peer address of the MSDP peer in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). access-list name Enter the name of an extended ACL that contains permitted SAs. If you do not use this option, all local entries are blocked. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache.
ip msdp shutdown Administratively shut down a configured MSDP peer. Syntax Parameters ip msdp shutdown {peer address} peer address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip multicast-msdp Enable MSDP. Syntax ip multicast-msdp To exit MSDP, use the no ip multicast-msdp command. Defaults Not configured.
Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1 Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1 Local Addr: 100.1.1.
00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 Dell# 225.1.2.1 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.2 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.3 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.4 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.5 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.6 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.7 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.8 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.9 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.10 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.12 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.13 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.14 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.15 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.16 10.
34 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), conforms to IEEE 802.1s. debug spanning-tree mstp Enable debugging of the multiple spanning tree protocol and view information on the protocol. Syntax Parameters debug spanning-tree mstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events] all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
Example Dell#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu tengigabitethernet 0/16 ? in Receive (in) out Transmit (out) Dell# description Enter a description of the multiple spanning tree. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description to identify the multiple spanning tree (maximum 80 characters). Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-mstp”.
disable Enable bridge protocol data units (BPDU) filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port-fast enabled interfaces. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Defaults disabled. Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Version 8.3.16.
hello-time Set the time interval between generation of MSTB bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command. Parameters seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. max-hops Configure the maximum hop count. Syntax max-hops number To return to the default values, use the no max-hops command. Parameters range Enter a number for the maximum hop count. The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20. Defaults 20 hops Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Valid priority values are: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected. Defaults default bridge-priority is 32768. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, all VLANs are mapped to MST instance zero (0) unless you use the vlan range command to map it to a non-zero instance.
protocol spanning-tree mstp To enable and configure the multiple spanning tree group, enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree mstp To disable the multiple spanning tree group, use the no protocol spanningtree mstp command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. MSTP is not enabled when you enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
Usage Information For two MSTP switches to be within the same MST region, the switches must share the same revision number. Related Commands msti — maps the VLAN(s) to an MST instance. name — assigns the region name to the MST region. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown. Syntax show config Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
10 101-105 Dell# show spanning-tree msti View the multiple spanning tree instance. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show spanning-tree msti [instance-number [brief]] [guard] instancenumber (Optional) Enter the multiple spanning tree instance number. The range is from 0 to 63. brief (Optional) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance. guard (Optional) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an MSTP interface and the current port state.
Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Filter Boundary ---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- ----------- --------------- ---Te 0/41 Desg 128.170 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No No No Te 0/42 Desg 128.171 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No No No Te 0/43 Desg 128.172 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No No No Dell# Example (EDS and LBK) The bold line shows the loopback BPDU inconsistency (LBK_INC).
BPDU (MRecords): sent 21, received 9 The port is not in the Edge port mode Usage Information Example (Guard) The following describes the show spanning-tree msti 5 guard command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Name MSTP interface. Instance MSTP instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
spanning-tree msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance cost and priority for an interface. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority} msti instance Enter the keyword msti and the MST instance number. The range is from zero (0) to 63. cost cost (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information bpdufilter (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword edgeport to enable edge port configuration to move the interface into forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpdufilter to stop sending and receiving BPDUs on the port-fast enabled ports. shutdown-onviolation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, the sytem implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP. This mechanism helps in flushing the MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology changes.
35 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 Multicast Commands • IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
ip mroute Assign a static mroute. Syntax ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance] To delete a specific static mroute, use the ip mroute destination mask {ipaddress | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance] command. To delete all mroutes matching a certain mroute, use the no ip mroute destination mask command.
Related Commands show ip mroute — views the multicast routing table. ip multicast-limit To limit the number of multicast entries on the system, use this feature. Syntax Parameters ip multicast-limit limit limit Defaults 15000 routes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system. The range is from 1 to 50000. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ip pim sparse-mode — enables IGMP and PIM on an interface. show ip mroute View the multicast routing table.
displayed for a specified multicast source. Enter the keyword count to display the total number of multicast routes with the spanned IIF. Command Modes Command History Example (Static) Example (Snooping) • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 9.2. (0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip mroute static Mroute: 23.23.23.0/24, interface: Lo 2 Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23 Dell#show ip mroute snooping IPv4 Multicast Snooping Table (*, 224.0.0.
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip mroute command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table. Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
Usage Information Network administrators use static mroutes to control the reach-ability of the multicast sources. If a PIM-registered multicast source is reachable using static mroute as well as unicast route, the distance of each route is examined and the route with shorter distance is the one the PIM selects for reach-ability. NOTE: The default distance of mroutes is zero (0) and is CLI configurable on a per route basis. Example Dell#show ip rpf RPF information for 10.10.10.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To debug the MLD protocol for all ports or for specified ports, use the debug ipv6 mld_host command. Displayed information includes when a query is received, when a report is sent, when a mcast joins or leaves a group, and some reasons why an MLD query is rejected. ip multicast-limit To limit the number of multicast entries on the system, use this feature.
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) 36 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the network discovery protocol for IPv6. The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) • For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
hardware_addr ess Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a 48-bit hardware MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor addresses stored on the control processor (CP).
Example Dell#show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min) HardwareAddress State Interface/VLAN/ CPU --------------------------------------------------------fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc6 1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c6 STALE Gi 1/9 CP fe80::201:eff:fe17:5bc7 1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c7 STALE Gi 1/10 CP fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bc8 1439 00:01:e8:17:5b:c8 STALE Gi 1/11 CP fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5caf 0.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) 37 The MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports open shortest path first version 2 (OSPFv2) for IPv4 and version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6. Up to 16 OSPF instances can be run simultaneously on the MXL Switch. OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS).
Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535. cost Specifies the stub area’s advertised external route metric. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. Defaults cost = 1; no areas are configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In the Dell Networking operating software, cost is defined as reference bandwidth.
area range Summarize routes matching an address/mask at an area border router (ABR). Syntax area area-id range ip-address mask [not-advertise] To disable route summarization, use the no area area-id range ip-address mask command. Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535. ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format. mask Specify a mask for the destination prefix. Enter the full mask (for example, 255.255.255.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To configure all routers and access servers within a stub, use this command. Related Commands router ospf — enters ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance. auto-cost Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors. Syntax Parameters clear ip ospf process-id statistics [interface name {neighbor router-id}] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process. Syntax debug ip ospf process-id [bfd |event | packet | spf | databasetimer rate-limit] To cancel the debug command, use the no debug ip ospf command. Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
Field Description rid: Displays the OSPF router ID. aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID. chk: Displays the OSPF checksum. aut: States if OSPF authentication is configured.
Example Dell#debug ip ospf 1 packet OSPF process 90, packet debugging is on Dell# 08:14:24 : OSPF(100:00): Xmt. v:2 t:1(HELLO) l:44 rid:192.1.1.1 aid:0.0.0.1 chk:0xa098 aut:0 auk: keyid:0 to:Gi 4/3 dst: 224.0.0.5 netmask:255.255.255.0 pri:1 N-, MC-, E+, T-, hi:10 di:40 dr:90.1.1.1 bdr:0.0.0.0 default-information originate To generate a default external route into an OSPF routing domain, configure the system.
default-metric Change the metrics of redistributed routes to a value useful to OSPF. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default values, use the no default-metric [number] command. Parameters number Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the metric. The range is from 1 to 16777214. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command. Parameters weight Specify an administrative distance. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a router ID in the dotted decimal format. If you enter a router ID, include the mask for that router address.
Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information • external dist3 = 110 • inter-area dist2 = 110 • intra-area dist1 = 110 ROUTER OSPF Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To specify a distance for routes learned from other routing domains, use the redistribute command. distribute-list in Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table.
distribute-list out To restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation, apply a filter. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command. Parameters prefix-listname Enter the name of a configured prefix list. bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.
Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The higher this parameter is set, the faster OSPF converge takes place. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This behavior impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements.
graceful-restart grace-period Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the router’s neighbors continue to advertise the router as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds To disable the grace period, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command. Parameters seconds Defaults Not Configured Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.
graceful-restart mode Enable the graceful restart mode. Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] To disable graceful restart mode, use the no graceful-restart mode command. Parameters planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only. unplannedonly (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme until the grace period expires. Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds To return to the default, use the no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time command. Parameters seconds Defaults zero (0) seconds. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the seconds. The range is from 0 to 300.
ip ospf cost Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface. Syntax ip ospf cost cost To return to default value, use the no ip ospf cost command. Parameters cost Enter a number as the cost. The range is from 1 to 65535. Defaults The default cost is based on the reference bandwidth. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If this command is not configured, cost is based on the auto-cost command.
Related Commands ip ospf hello-interval — sets the time interval between the hello packets. ip ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface. Syntax ip ospf hello-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip ospf hello-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Usage Information You can configure a maximum of six digest keys on an interface. Of the available six digest keys, the switches select the MD5 key that is common. The remaining MD5 keys are unused. To change to a different key on the interface, enable the new key while the old key is still enabled. The system sends two packets: the first packet authenticated with the old key and the second packet authenticated with the new key.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf priority To determine the designated router for the OSPF network, set the priority of the interface. Syntax ip ospf priority number To return to the default setting, use the no ip ospf priority command. Parameters number Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the priority.
This interval must be greater than the expected round-trip time for a packet to travel between two routers. Defaults 5 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. For example, the interval must be larger for interfaces connected to virtual links.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range for OSPFv2 is from 1 to 16. The default for OSPFv2 is 4 paths. The range for OSPFv3 is from 1 to 64.
Usage Information This command is either enabled or disabled. If no OSPF process is identified as the MIB manager, the first OSPF process is used. If an OSPF process has been selected, it must be disabled prior to assigning new process ID the MIB responsibility. network area Define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF area for those interfaces. Syntax network ip-address mask area area-id To disable an OSPF area, use the no network ip-address mask area areaid command.
passive-interface Suppress both receiving and sending routing updates on an interface. Syntax passive-interface {default | interface} To enable both the receiving and sending routing, use the no passiveinterface interface command. To return all OSPF interfaces (current and future) to active, use the no passiveinterface default command. Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive.
• The ABR status for the router is updated. • Save passive-interface interface into the running configuration. passive-interface default • All present and future OSPF interfaces are marked as passive. • Any adjacency is explicitly terminated from all OSPF interfaces. • All previous passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running configuration. • All previous no passive-interface interface commands are removed from the running configuration.
1 = OSPF External type 1 • 2 = OSPF External type 2 route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of the route map. tag tag-value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tag then a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History • Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Command Modes Command History ROUTER OSPF Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. redistribute isis Redistribute IS-IS routing information throughout the OSPF instance.
router-id To configure a fixed router ID, use this command. Syntax router-id ip-address To remove the fixed router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the router ID in the IP address format. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router. However, each router ID must be unique.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter ROUTER OSPF mode and configure OSPF. Example Dell(conf)#router ospf 2 Dell(conf-router_ospf)# show config Display the non-default values in the current OSPF configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0. The following describes the show ip ospf command shown in the following example. Line Beginning with Description “Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the process ID. “Supports only...” Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported. “SPF schedule...
Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To isolate problems with external routes, use this command. In OSPF, external routes are calculated by adding the LSA cost to the cost of reaching the ASBR router.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database command shown in the following example. Field Description Link ID Identifies the router ID. ADV Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID. Age Displays the link state age. Seq# Identifies the link state sequence number.
Related Commands show ip ospf database asbr-summary — displays only ASBR summary LSA information. show ip ospf database asbr-summary Display information about autonomous system (AS) boundary LSAs. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database asbr-summary [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
Field Description • Example E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs. LS Type Displays the LSA’s type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the advertising router’s ID. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area. TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options.
show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database external [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
Example Field Description Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router. LS Seq Number Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or duplicate LSAs. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Network Mask Displays the network mask implemented on the area. Metrics Type Displays the external type. TOS Displays the Type of Service (TOS) options.
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 701 Dell# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database network Display the network (type 2) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database network [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
Field Example Description • DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. • E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs. LS Type Displays the LSA’s type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router. Checksum Identifies the link state sequence number. This number enables you to identify old or duplicate LSAs.
show ip ospf database nssa-external Display NSSA-External (type 7) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf database nssa-external [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] link-state-id adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Command History Related Commands • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example • • (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router and the ipaddress to display only the LSA information about that router. EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database opaquearea command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age.
Checksum: 0x376 Length: 28 Opaque Type: 1 Opaque ID: 1 Unable to display opaque data LS age: 833 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.2 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000002 Checksum: 0x19c2 --More-Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-as Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information.
show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database opaque-link [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Command History Usage Information 966 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 • the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs • the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs • the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Item Description (Link ID) Identifies the link type and address. (Link Data) Identifies the router interface address. Number of TOS Metric Lists the number of TOS metrics. TOS 0 Metric Lists the number of TOS 0 metrics. Dell#show ip ospf 100 database router OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100) Router (Area 0) LS age: 967 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Router Link State ID: 1.1.1.10 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.
Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database summary Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database summary [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
Item Description • Example E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs. LS Type Displays the LSA type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router. LS Seq Number Displays the link state sequence number. This number allows you to identify old or duplicate LSAs. Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA.
# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information 970 show ip ospf process-id interface [interface] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process.
Example Item Description Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric for this interface. Transmit Delay... This line displays the interface’s settings for Transmit Delay, State, and Priority. In the State setting, BDR is Backup Designated Router. Designated Router... This line displays the ID of the Designated Router and its interface address. Backup Designated... This line displays the ID of the Backup Designated Router and its interface address.
Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 192.168.253.2/32, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1 Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host. Dell> show ip ospf neighbor Display the OSPF neighbors connected to the local router. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example show ip ospf process-id neighbor process-id EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip ospf routes Display routes OSPF calculates and stores in OSPF RIB. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id routes process-id Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
global Enter the keyword global to display the packet counts received on all running OSPF interfaces and packet counts OSPF neighbors receive and transmit. interface name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface then one of the following interface keywords and slot/port or number information: neighbor router-id Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 974 Version 8.3.16.
Row Heading Description Hello-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the hello packets. LSR-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state request packets. Other-Q The queue, for transmission or reception, for the link state acknowledgement, database description, and update packets. The following describes the error definitions for the show ip ospf statistics process-id global command.
LSAck RX 2 TX 2 Total Error Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd 34 0 26 2 1 3 34 0 25 3 1 3 OSPF Global Queue Length TxQ-Len RxQ-Len Tx-Mark Rx-Mark Hello-Q 0 0 1 1 LSR-Q 0 0 1 1 Other-Q 0 0 2 2 Error packets (Receive statistics) Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0 Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0 Auth-Err 0 MD5-Err 0 Chksum 0 Version 0 AreaMis 0 Conf-Issues 0 No-Buffer 0 Seq-No 0 Socket 0 Q-OverFlow 0 Unknown-Pkt 0 RtidZero 0 Error packets (Transmit statistics) Socket Errors 0 Dell# Usage Information Exa
Dell# Related Commands LSR-Q-Len 0 LSR-Q-Wmark 1 clear ip ospf statistics — clears the packet statistics in all interfaces and neighbors. show ip ospf timers rate-limit Show the LSA currently in the queue waiting for timers to expire. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id timers rate-limit process-id Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
Command Modes Command History • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To isolate problems with inter-area and external routes, use this command. In OSPF inter-area and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is correct or not.
to OSPF, but you don't want OSPF to advertise routes with prefix 1.1.0.0, you can configure the summary-address 1.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise to filter out all the routes fall in range 1.1.0.0/16. Related Commands area range — summarizes routes within an area. timers spf Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. Syntax timers spf delay holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers spf command.
Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information hold-interval Set the next interval to send the same LSA. This interval is the time between sending the same LSA after the start-interval has been attempted. The range is from 1 to 600,000 milliseconds. max-interval Set the maximum amount of time the system waits before sending the LSA. The range is from 1 to 600,000 milliseconds. • start-interval: 0 msec • hold-interval: 5000 msec • max-interval: 5000 msec ROUTER OSPF Version 8.3.16.
OSPFv3 Commands Open shortest path first version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6 is supported on the MXL Switch platform. The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) remain unchanged. However, OSPFv3 runs on a per-link basis instead of on a per-IP-subnet basis. Most changes were necessary to handle the increased address size of IPv6. The Dell Networking implementation of OSPFv3 is based on IETF RFC 2740.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, you must first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (same SPI and key) on each interface in an OSPFv3 link. An SPI number must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
keyencryptionalgorithm (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. key Text string used in encryption. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are: 3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AESCBC -32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192. authenticationalgorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1.
you enable authentication on an area with the area authentication command, you do not enable encryption at the same time. If you have enabled IPsec authentication in an OSPFv3 area with the area authentication command, you cannot use the area encryption command in the area at the same time. The configuration of IPsec encryption on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration.
• Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following section describes the command fields. Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
debug ipv6 ospf Display debug information and interface types on OSPF IPv6 packets or events. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History debug ipv6 ospf {packet | events} [interface] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/ port or number information: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
route-map map-name Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Version 9.2(0.0) • 1 = Type 1 external route • 2 = Type 2 external route (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
function in a “restarting-only” role. In a “restarting-only” role, OSPFv3 does not participate in the graceful restart of a neighbor. graceful-restart mode Specify the type of events that trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart mode {planned-only | unplanned-only} To disable graceful restart mode, enter no graceful-restart mode. Parameters planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only.
ipv6 ospf area Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf process id area area id To disable OSPFv6 routing for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the process identification number. area area-id Specify the OSPF area. The range is from 0 to 65535. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 ospf authentication Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface.
For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. The default is Active. Defaults See Parameters. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Using this formula, the default path cost is calculated as: • GigabitEthernet—Default cost is 1 • TenGigabitEthernet—Default cost is 1 • FortygigEthernet — Default cost is 1 • Ethernet—Default cost is 10 ipv6 ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the time interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router down. Syntax Parameters ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds seconds Enter the time interval in seconds.
Parameters null Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. esp encryptionalgorithm Encryption algorithm used with ESP. Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. keyencryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted.
Usage Information Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable IPv6 unicast routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the interface to an area. An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same encryption policy (same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link.
Defaults 10 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network. ipv6 ospf priority To determine the Designated Router for the OSPFv3 network, set the priority of the interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf priority number To return to the default time interval, use the no ipv6 ospf priority command.
Parameters process-id Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Enter the process identification number. The range is from 1 to 65535. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64.
Parameters Command Modes Default Enter the keyword default to make all OSPF interfaces (current and future) passive. interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
Parameters bgp as number Enter the keyword bgp then the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces. static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes. metric metricvalue Enter the keyword metric then the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16777214. The default is 20.
Usage Information To redistribute the default route (x:x:x:x::x), use the default-information originate command. Related Commands default-information originate — generates a default route into the OSPF routing domain. router-id Designate a fixed router ID. Syntax router-id ip-address To return to the previous router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Enter the router ID in the dotted decimal format.
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies. Syntax Parameters show crypto ipsec policy [name name] name name Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Displays configuration details about a specified policy. EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router. show ipv6 ospf database Display information in the OSPFv3 database, including link-state advertisements (LSAs).
show ipv6 ospf interface View OSPFv3 interface information. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 ospf [interface] interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/ port or number information: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet and the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet and the slot/port information.
show ipv6 ospf neighbor Display the OSPF neighbor information on a per-interface basis. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 ospf neighbor [interface] interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
38 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell Networking operating software (OS) in MXL platform.
To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command. Parameters redirect-listname Enter the name of a configured redirect list. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-vl-) Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. Version 7.4.2.0 Added support for LAG and VLAN interfaces.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.4.0.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. Version 6.5.3.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. permit Configure a rule for the redirect list.
bit (OPTIONAL) For the TCP protocol type only, enter one or a combination of the following TCP flags: • operator Defaults none Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST Command History ack = acknowledgement • fin = finish (no more data from the user) • psh = push function • rst = reset the connection • syn = synchronize sequence number • urg = urgent field (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only.
host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator] command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the forwarding router. slot/port Enter the keyword slot / port followed by the slot/port information. ip-protocolnumber Enter a number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol header.
Defaults none Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST Command History Version 9.4.0.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Version 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series. Version 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
show cam pbr Display the PBR CAM content. Syntax Parameters show cam pbr {[interface interface] | stack—unit slot-number port-set number]} [summary] interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the name of the interface. stack–unit number Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot number. The range is from 0 to 11 . port-set number Enter the keywords port-set then the port-pipe number. The range is from 0 to 1. summary Enter the keyword summary to view only the total number of CAM entries.
0.0.0.0/0 Dell# Related Commands 00:00:04:b7:14:29 Vl 1008(0/3) • ip redirect-group – applies a redirect group to an interface. • show ip redirect-list – displays the redirect-list configuration. • show cam-usage – displays the CAM usage on ACL, router, or switch. show ip redirect-list View the redirect list configuration and the interfaces it is applied to.
PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) 39 The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands • IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. clear ip pim rp-mapping The bootstrap router (BSR) feature uses this command to remove all or particular rendezvous point (RP) advertisement.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you use this command on a local VLT node, all multicast routes from the local PIM TIB, the entire multicast route table, and all the entries in the data plane are deleted. The local VLT node sends a request to the peer VLT node to download multicast routes learned by the peer. Both local and synced routes are removed from the local VLT node multicast route table.
timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register] Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timer to view PIM timers. Enter one of the optional parameters: • assert: to view the assertion timer • hello: to view the PIM neighbor keepalive timer • joinprune: to view the expiry timer (join/prune timer) • register: to view the register suppression timer Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. hash-masklength (OPTIONAL) Enter the hash mask length. The range is from zero (0) to 32. The default is 30.
ip pim join-filter Permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list. This command prevents the PIM-SM router from creating state based on multicast source and/or group. Syntax ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out} To remove the access list, use the no ip pim join-filter ext-access-list {in | out} command. Parameters ext-access-list Enter the name of an extended access list. in Enter this keyword to apply the access list to inbound traffic.
Example Dell(conf)# ip access-list standard map1 Dell(config-std-nacl)# permit 224.0.0.1/24 Dell(config-std-nacl)#exit Dell(conf)#int gig 1/1 Dell(config-if-gi-1/1)# ip pim ingress-interface-map map1 ip pim neighbor-filter To prevent a router from participating in protocol independent multicast (PIM), configure this feature. Syntax ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list} To remove the restriction, use the no ip pim neighbor-filter {accesslist} command.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature. Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command. Parameters access-list Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
NOTE: This option is applicable to multicast group range. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. First-hop routers use this address by to send register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts. The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learned using BSR take priority over static RP addresses.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Priority is stored at BSR router when receiving a Candidate-RP-Advertisement. ip pim sparse-mode Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface. Syntax ip pim sparse-mode To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, use the no ip pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command configures an expiration timer for all S.G entries, unless they are assigned to an Extended ACL. ip pim spt-threshold To switch to the shortest path tree when the traffic reaches the specified threshold value, configure the PIM router. Syntax ip pim spt-threshold value | infinity To return to the default value, use the no ip pim spt-threshold command.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, when you enable PIM-SM snooping, a switch floods all multicast traffic to the PIM designated router (DR), including unnecessary multicast packets. To minimize the traffic sent over the network to the designated router, you can disable designated-router flooding.
show ip pim interface View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled. Syntax show ip pim interface Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example 1024 Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim interface command shown in the following example. Field Description Address Lists the IP addresses of the interfaces participating in PIM.
show ip pim neighbor View PIM neighbors. Syntax show ip pim neighbor Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor.
Parameters Command Modes Command History mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal format to view RP for a specific group. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#sh ip pim rp Group RP 224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4 224.2.217.146 165.87.20.4 224.3.3.3 165.87.20.4 225.1.2.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example (#2) • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim snooping interface commands shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Displays the VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim snooping neighbor commands shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the neighbor learned through PIM-SM snooping. Interface Displays the VLAN ID number and slot/port on which the PIM-SM-enabled neighbor was discovered.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display TIB information PIM-SM snooping discovered for a specified multicast group. source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display TIB information PIM-SM snooping discovered for a specified multicast source. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Field Description • Example received a (*,G) Join message Dell#show ip pim snooping tib PIM Multicast Snooping Table Flags: J/P - (*,G) Join/Prune, j/p - (S,G) Join/Prune SGR-P - (S,G,R) Prune Timers: Uptime/Expires * : Inherited port (*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:00:01, expires 00:02:59, RP 165.87.70.1, flags: J Incoming interface: Vlan 2, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 4/11 RPF 165.87.32.
Interface 1 0 3 summary: active PIM interface passive PIM interfaces active PIM neighbors TIB summary: 1/1 (*,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 1/1 (S,G) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0/0 (S,G,Rpt) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 0 0 0 0 PIM nexthops RPs sources Register states Message summary: 2582/2583 Joins sent/received 5/0 Prunes sent/received 0/0 Candidate-RP advertisements sent/received 0/0 BSR messages sent/received 0/0 State-Refresh messages sent/received 0/0 MSDP updates sent/received 0/0 Null Register messages sent/
Command History Usage Information Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show ip pim tib command shown in the following example. Field Description (S, G) Displays the entry in the multicast PIM database. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the PIM route table. expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires and is removed from the database. RP Displays the IP address of the RP/source for this entry.
Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode (*, 226.1.1.1), uptime 01:29:19, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 8/0 (*, 226.1.1.2), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 4/23, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 8/0 (*, 226.1.1.3), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.
IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv6 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. ipv6 pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-border Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR messages. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time-out.
Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the IPv6 interface. Syntax ipv6 pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ipv6 pim dr-priority command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Enter a number.
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list. ipv6 pim register-filter Configure the source DR so that it does not send register packets to the RP for the specified sources and groups. Syntax Parameters ipv6 pim register-filter access-list access-list Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example Version 9.2(0.
Parameters address Enter the IPv6 RP address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. group-address group-address mask Enter the keywords group-address then the group address in the x:x:x:x::x format and then the mask in /nn format to assign that group address to the RP. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP.
priority-value Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the priority of this RP Candidate, which is included in the Candidate-RPAdvertisements. The range is 0 (highest) to 255 (lowest). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 pim sparse-mode Enable IPv6 PIM sparse mode on the interface. Syntax ipv6 pim sparse-mode To disable IPv6 PIM sparse mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled.
Defaults 10 kbps Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source. show ipv6 pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router (v2). Syntax show ipv6 pim bsr-router Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.2(0.
Example Dell#show ipv6 pim interface Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR Mode Count Intvl Prio Gi 10/3 v2/S 1 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f DR : this router Gi 10/11 v2/S 0 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:1417 DR : this router Dell# show ipv6 pim neighbor Displays IPv6 PIM neighbor information. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show ipv6 pim neighbor [detail] detail • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PIM Multicast Routing Table Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, C - Connected, L - Local, P Pruned, R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set, J Join SPT, M - MSDP created entry, A - Candidate for MSDP Advertisement K - Ack-Pending State Timers: Uptime/Expires Interface state: Interface, next-Hop, State/Mode (25::1, ff0e::225:1:2:1), uptime 00:09:53, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: GigabitEthernet 10/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 10/11 (25::1, ff0e::225:1:2
40 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember • Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as Port Channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). • The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
Version 8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. monitor session — enables a monitoring session. flow-based enable Enable flow-based monitoring. Syntax flow-based enable To disable flow-based monitoring, use the no flow-based enable command. Defaults Disabled, that is flow-based monitoring is not applied. Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID) Command History Usage Information Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for the RPM/ERPM. Version 9.3(0.
Parameters session-ID Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535. type rpm | erpm Specifies one of the following type: Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History • rpm: to create remote port monitoring session. • erpm: to create encapsulated remote port monitoring session. • If no option is specified, by default SPAN will be created. Version 9.4(0.0) Added support for rpm / erpm. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
no disable Dell# show monitor session Display the monitor information of a particular session or all sessions. Syntax show monitor session {session-ID} To display monitoring information for all sessions, use the show monitor session command. Parameters session-ID Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535. Version 9.4.0.0 Added support for the RPM / ERPM.
Parameters session-ID Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number. The range from 0 to 65535. Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The monitoring command is saved in the running configuration at the Monitor Session mode level and can be restored after a chassis reload.
range Enter the keyword range to specify a list of interfaces. destination Enter the keyword destination to specify the destination interface. interface direction {rx | tx | both} • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keyword LAG then port channel and the port-channel id .
Private VLAN (PVLAN) 41 Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, refer to the following commands. The command output is augmented in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
• Isolated port: An isolated port is a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN. • Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port is a port that is allowed to communicate with any other port type. • Trunk port: A trunk port carries VLAN traffic across switches: – A trunk port in a PVLAN is always tagged. – A trunk port in Tagged mode carries primary or secondary VLAN traffic. The tag on the packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs.
switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax. Parameters vlan-list Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
private-vlan mode Set PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN. isolated Enter the keyword isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces. Syntax Parameters show interfaces private-vlan [interface interface] interface interface Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface then the ID of the specific interface for which to display PVLAN status. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. show vlan private-vlan — displays the PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show vlan private-vlan Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
The following describes the show private-vlan command shown in the Examples below. Example (All) Field Description Primary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated primary VLAN(s). Secondary Displays the VLAN ID of the designated or associated secondary VLAN(s). Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the listed interfaces reside. Active States whether the interface is operationally up or down. Ports Displays the interface IDs in the listed VLAN.
Usage Information If the VLAN ID is that of a primary VLAN, the entire private VLAN output is displayed, as shown below. If the VLAN ID is a secondary VLAN, only its primary VLAN and its particular secondary VLAN properties are displayed, as shown in the second Example.
Related Commands private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. show vlan private-vlan — displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. switchport mode private-vlan Set PVLAN mode of the selected port.
Related Commands private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associates the secondary VLANs to it. show interfaces private-vlan — displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 42 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line. description Enter a description of the PVST+. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter PVST+ mode. edge-port bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command.
Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------ ----------- -------------------------- -------Po 23 128.24 128 1600 FWD 0 32768 001e.c9f1.00f3 128.24 Te 5/41 128.450 128 2000 DIS 0 32768 001e.c9f1.00f3 128.450 Te 5/50 128.459 128 2000 FWD 0 32768 001e.c9f1.00f3 128.459 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Edge BpduFilter ---------- ------ ----------- ---------Po 23 Desg 128.24 128 No Te 5/41 Dis 128.450 128 No Te 5/50 Desg 128.
Usage Information After you enable PVST+, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports. Related Commands disable — disables PVST+. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. Syntax Parameters show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
Field Description Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard). Bpdu Filter Yes - Bpdu filter Enabled No - Bpdu filter Disabled Example (Brief) Dell# show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 brief VLAN 2 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.
Number of transitions to forwarding state 0 BPDU sent 8, received 0 The port is not in the Edge port mode, bpdu filter is disabled Port 450 (TenGigabitEthernet 5/41) is disabled Discarding Port path cost 2000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.450 Designated root has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated port id is 128.
Related Commands spanning-tree pvst — configure PVST+ on an interface. spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
priority value Enter the keyword priority then the Port priority value in increments of 16. The range is from 0 to 240. The default is 128. rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on a PVST+ port or port-channel interface. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Some non-Dell Networking systems which have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two kinds of BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU. Dell Networking systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU on an untagged port. If this happens, the system places the port in the Error-Disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging.
Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094. bridge-priority value Enter the keywords bridge-priority then the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768. Defaults 32768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands vlan bridge-priority — sets the bridge-priority value. vlan hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. vlan max-age — changes the time interval before PVST+ refreshes. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. vlan hello-time Set the time interval between generation of PVST+ and BPDUs. Syntax vlan vlan-id hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no vlan hello-time command.
vlan max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the PVST+ bridge. Syntax vlan vlan-range max-age seconds To return to the default, use the no vlan max-age command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-age seconds Enter the keywords max-age then the time interval, in seconds, that the system waits before refreshing configuration information.
43 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. This chapter contains the following sections: • Global Configuration Commands • Per-Port QoS Commands • Policy-Based QoS Commands Global Configuration Commands There are only two global configuration QoS commands.
service-class dot1p-mapping This command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History service-class dot1p-mapping user-priority user-priority The user-priority value ranges from 0 to 7. CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis. dot1p-priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The dot1p-priority command changes the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. The system places traffic marked with a priority in the correct queue and processes that traffic according to its queue.
Usage Information NOTE: Per port rate police is supported for Layer 2 tagged and untagged switched traffic and for Layer 3 traffic. Per VLAN rate police is supported on only tagged ports with Layer 2 switched traffic. On one interface, you can configure the rate police command for a VLAN or you can configure the rate police command for an interface. For each physical interface, you can configure three rate police commands specifying different VLANS.
service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry. Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p To return to the default setting, use the no service-class dynamic dot1p command. Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command.
service-class bandwidth-percentage Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues. Syntax Parameters service-class bandwidth-percentage queue0 number queue1 number queue2 number queue3 number number Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Enter the bandwidth-weight, as a percentage. The range is from 1 to 100. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. After you configure a unicast queue as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is treated as a strict-priority queue. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are serviced. For example, if you send 100% line rate traffic over the SP queue, it starves all other queues on the ports on which this traffic is flowing.
Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100%, the bandwidth percentage automatically scales down to 100%. Related Commands qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy. class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-ofservice policies to each class.
match ip precedence — identifies the IP precedence values as match criteria. match ip dscp configures the match criteria based on the DSCP value. match ip access-group — configures a match criterion for a class map based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL. match mac dot1p — configures a match criterion for a class map based on a dot1p value. match mac vlan — configures a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID. service-queue — assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
crypto key zeroize rsa Removes the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location. Syntax crypto key zeroize rsa Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL match ip access-group Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL).
Parameters vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then the ID of the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults none Command Modes CONF-CLASS-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.4(0.0) Usage Information Introduced on the MXL switch.
Use this command to match an IP class-map against a single VRF ID . Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum).
dscp-list Enter the IP DSCP values that is to be the match criteria. Separate values by commas — no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a hyphen (1-3). The range is from 0 to 63. set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords set-ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP CONFIGURATION (config-class-map) Command History Usage Information Version 9.5(0.
ip-any Enter the keyword ip-any to support IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. ipprecedence-list Enter the IP precedence value(s) as the match criteria. Separate values by commas — no spaces ( 1,2,3 ) or indicate a list of values separated by a hyphen (1-3). The range is from 0 to 7. set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords set-ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
Command Modes Command History CLASS-MAP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match mac dot1p Configure a match criterion for a class map based on a dot1p value.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. You can match against only one VLAN ID. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps. An aggregate QoS policy is part of the policy map (input/output) applied on an interface.
policy-map-input Create an input policy map. Syntax policy-map-input policy-map-name [layer2] To remove an input policy map, use the no policy-map-input policy-mapname [layer2] command. Parameters policy-mapname Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map. The default is Layer 3. Defaults Layer 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map. This command enables Policy-Map-Output Configuration mode (conf-policymap-out).
When changing a Service-Queue configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset. Related Commands rate police — incoming traffic policing function. qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy. Syntax qos-policy-output qos-policy-name To remove an existing output QoS policy, use the no qos-policy-output qospolicy-name command.
The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committedrate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 10000. burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB. The range is from 16 to 200000. The default is 100. peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak then a number to specify the peak rate in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 10000. The default is the same as designated for committed-rate. Defaults Burst size is 100 KB.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you apply rate-shape in QoS policy both on the Queue Level and in Aggregate mode, the queue-based shaping occurs first then aggregate rate shaping. Related Commands rate shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy.
Related Commands policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface. Syntax service-policy output policy-map-name To remove the output policy map from the interface, use the no servicepolicy output policy-map-name command. Parameters policy-mapname Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters maximum).
Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 3 (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control traffic). class-map class-mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword class-map then the class map name assigned to the queue in character format (32 character maximum). NOTE: This option is available under policy-mapinput only.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. After the IP DSCP bit is set, other QoS services can then operate on the bit settings. show qos class-map View the current class map information.
detail interface Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example (IPv4) To view a policy map interface in detail, enter the keyword detail and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Version 9.2(0.
class classmap-name Enter the keyword class then the class map name. qos-policyinput qospolicy-name Enter the keyword qos-policy-input then the QoS policy name. Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
0 Dell# qosPolicyOutput show qos qos-policy-input View the input QoS policy details. Syntax Parameters show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name] qos-policyname Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the QoS policy name. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos qos-policy-input Qos-policy-input QosInput Rate-police 100 50 peak 100 50 Dscp 32 Dell# show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details.
Example Dell#show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qmap_out Bandwidth-percentage 10 Qos-policy-output qmap_wg Rate-shape 100 50 Wred yellow wy Wred green wg Dell# show qos statistics View QoS statistics. Syntax Parameters show qos statistics {wred-profile [interface]} | [interface] wred-profile interface interface Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example 1100 Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information The following describes the show qos statistics command in the following example. Field (ED and EE) Description Queue # Queue Number Matched Pkts The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria. NOTE: When you configure trust, matched packet counters are not incremented in this field.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on THE MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos wred-profile Wred-profile-name wred_drop wred_ge_y wred_ge_g wred_teng_y wred_teng_g WRED1 min-threshold 0 1024 2048 4096 8192 2000 max-threshold 0 2048 4096 8192 16384 7000 test cam-usage Check the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage. Syntax Parameters test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stack-unit {[number | [all]} policy-map Enter the policy map name.
Field Description CAM Partition The CAM space where the rules are added. Available CAM Indicates the free CAM space, in the partition, for the classification rules. NOTE: The CAM entries reserved for the default rules are not included in the Available CAM column; free entries, from the default rules space, cannot be used as a policy map for the classification rules.
trust Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust. Syntax Parameters trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]} diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings. dot1p Enter the keyword dot1p to specify trust dot1p configuration. fallback Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps.
wred Designate the WRED profile to yellow or green traffic. Syntax wred [[{yellow | green} profile-name] ecn] To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name] command. Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx maps to green. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum).
wred ecn To indicate network congestion, rather than dropping packets, use explicit congestion notification (ECN). Syntax wred ecn To stop marking packets, use the no wred ecn command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command.
wred-profile Create a WRED profile and name the profile. Syntax wred-profile wred-profile-name To remove an existing WRED profile, use the no wred-profile command. Parameters wred-profilename Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the pre-defined WRED profile names. You can configure up to 26 WRED profiles plus the five pre-defined profiles, for a total of 31 WRED profiles. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g.
Red Enter the red keyword. Traffic marked as red is dropped. dscp-list Enter a list of IP DSCP values. The dscp-list parameter specifies the full list of IP DSCP value(s) for the specified color. Each DSCP value in a list is separate values by commas – no spaces (1,2,3) or indicates a list of values separated by a hyphen (1-3). Range is 0 to 63. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIG-COLOR-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
qos dscp-color-map Configure the DSCP color map. Syntax qos dscp-color-map map-name To remove a color map, use the no qos dscp-color-map map-name command. Parameters map-name Enter the name of the DSCP color map. The map name can have a maximum of 32 characters. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
qos dscp-color-policy Associates the DSCP color map profile with an interface so that all IP packets received on it is given a color based on that color map. Syntax dscp-color-policy color-map-profile-name To remove a color policy map profile, use the no dscp-color-policy colormap-profile-name command. Parameters color-mapprofile-name Enter the color map profile name. The name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Parameters summary Enter the summary keyword to display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. Detail Enter the detail keyword to display detailed information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. interface Enter the name of the interface that has color policy configured. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific.
show qos dscp-color-map Display the DSCP color map for one or all interfaces. Syntax Parameters show qos dscp-color-map map-name map-name Enter the name of the color map. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5.0.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 44 Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. auto-summary Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes.
debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command. Parameters Command Modes Command History interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and ID as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1. route-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route-map. Defaults Disabled. Metric: 1. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum). Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.. router rip — enters ROUTER mode on the switch. distance Assign a weight (for prioritization) to all routes in the RIP routing table or to a specific route.
distribute-list in Configure a filter for incoming routing updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To delete the filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in command. Parameters prefix-listname Enter the name of a configured prefix list. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to filter only directly connected routes. ospf (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ospf to filter all OSPF routes. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to filter manually configured routes.
ip rip receive version To receive specific versions of RIP, set the interface. The RIP version you set on the interface overrides the version command in ROUTER RIP mode. Syntax ip rip receive version [1] [2] To return to the default, use the no ip rip receive version command. Parameters 1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 1 for RIP version 1. 2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2. Defaults RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information To enable the interface to send both version of RIP packets, use the ip rip send version 1 2 command. Related Commands ip rip receive version — sets the RIP version for the interface to receive traffic. version — sets the RIP version for the switch software. ip split-horizon Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface.
Usage Information RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange information. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER RIP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can enable an unlimited number of RIP networks. RIP operates over interfaces configured with any address the network command specifies. offset-list Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned using RIP.
Related Commands ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor. Syntax output-delay delay To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, use the no output-delay command. Parameters delay Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval. The range is from 8 to 50.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface still includes in RIP updates sent using other interfaces. Related Commands neighbor — enables RIP for a specified network. network — defines a neighbor. redistribute Redistribute information from other routing instances.
redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal | metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters process-id Enter a number that corresponds to the OSPF process ID to redistribute. The range is from 1 to 65355.
Usage Information To enable RIP, assign a network address using the network command. Example Dell(conf)#router rip Dell(conf-router_rip)# Related Commands network — enables RIP. show config Display the changes you made to the RIP configuration. The default values are not shown. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip rip database command shown in the following example. Field Description Total number of routes in RIP database Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database. 100.10.10.0/24 directly connected Lists the routes directly connected. 150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution. 209.9.16.0/24... Lists the routes and the sources advertising those routes.
Example show running-config rip ! router rip distribute-list Test1 in distribute-list Test21 out network 10.0.0.0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0 neighbor 20.20.20.20 redistribute ospf 999 version 2 timers basic Manipulate the RIP timers for routing updates, invalid, holddown times, and flush time. Syntax timers basic update invalid holddown flush To return to the default settings, use the no timers basic command.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information ROUTER RIP Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you change the timers on one router, also synchronize the timers on all routers in the RIP domain. version Specify either RIP version 1 or RIP version 2. Syntax version {1 | 2} To return to the default version setting, use the no version command. Parameters 1 Enter the keyword 1 to specify RIP version 1. 2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify RIP version 2.
45 Remote Monitoring (RMON) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) remote monitoring (RMON) is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
Parameters controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The integer value must be a unique index in the RMON history table. owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner then the owner name to record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.
rmon event Add an event in the RMON event table. Syntax rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner name] To disable RMON on an interface, use the no rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] command. Parameters number Assign an event number in integer format from 1 to 65535. The number value must be unique in the RMON event table. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON log entry.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show rmon RMON status total memory used 218840 bytes. ether statistics table: 8 entries, 4608 bytes ether history table: 8 entries, 6000 bytes alarm table: 390 entries, 102960 bytes high-capacity alarm table: 5 entries, 1680 bytes event table: 500 entries, 206000 bytes log table: 2 entries, 552 bytes Dell# show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Version 8.3.16.
Example (Brief) Dell#show rmon hc-alarm brief index SNMP OID ---------------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 Dell# show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table. Syntax Parameters show rmon history [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
show rmon log Display the contents of the RMON log table. Syntax Parameters show rmon log [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON log table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The log table has a maximum of 500 entries.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example (Index) Dell#show rmon statistics 6001 RMON statistics entry 6001 interface: ifIndex.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 46 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. bridge-priority Set the bridge priority for RSTP. Syntax bridge-priority priority-value To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command.
bpdu interface {in | out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug the bridge protocol data units. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface along with the type slot/port of the interface you want displayed. Type slot/ port options are the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-rstp”.) Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
Related Commands hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. max-age — changes the wait time before RSTP refreshes the protocol configuration information. hello-time Set the time interval between the generation of the RSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time [milli-second] seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command. Parameters seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs. The range is from 1 to 10 seconds.
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the RSTP bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters max-age Enter a number of seconds that the waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
protocol spanning-tree rstp To configure RSTP, enter RSTP mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree rstp To exit RSTP mode, use the exit command. Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information RSTP is not enabled when you enter RSTP mode. To enable RSTP globally on the system, use the no disable command from RSTP mode.
spanning-tree rstp Configure an RSTP interface with one of these settings: port cost, edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port priority, loop guard, or root guard. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree rstp {cost port-cost | edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]] | bpdufilter | priority priority | {rootguard}} cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
Usage Information The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack. This option places the port into an Error Disable state if a BPDU appears and a message is logged so that the administrator can take corrective action. NOTE: A port configured as an edge port, on an RSTP switch, immediately transitions to the Forwarding state.
• 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2000 • 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 1400 • Port Channel interface with one 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 2000 • Port Channel interface with one 40 Gigabit Ethernet = 1400 • Port Channel with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 1800 • Port Channel with two 40 Gigabit Ethernet = 600 edge-port Enter the keywords edge-port to configure the interface as a rapid spanning tree edge port.
If you do not enable shutdown-on-violation, BPDUs are still sent to the RPM CPU. You cannot enable STP root guard and loop guard at the same time on a port. For example, if you configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message displays: % Error: RootGuard is configured. Cannot configure LoopGuard.
47 Security This chapter contains various types of security commands offered in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The commands are listed in the following sections: • AAA Accounting Commands • Authorization and Privilege Commands • Authentication and Password Commands • RADIUS Commands • TACACS+ Commands • SSH Server and SCP Commands • Secure DHCP Commands For configuration details, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Parameters system Enter the keyword system to send accounting information of any other AAA configuration. exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. commands {level| role role-name} Enter the keyword command then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role.
Related Commands enable password — changes the password for the enable command. login authentication — enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. password — creates a password. tacacs-server host — specifies a TACACS+ server host. aaa accounting suppress Prevent the generation of accounting records of users with the user name value of NULL.
method-list Defaults none Command Modes LINE Command History Related Commands Enter a method list that you defined using the aaa accounting exec or aaa accounting commands. Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aaa accounting — enables AAA Accounting and creates a record for monitoring the accounting function.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command steps through all active sessions and then displays the accounting records for the active account functions.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands LINE Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aaa authorization commands — sets the parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands aaa authorization exec — sets the parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands.
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aaa authorization role-only Configure authentication to use the user’s role only when determining if access to commands is permitted. Syntax aaa authorization role-only To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication role-only command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
Related Commands login authentication, password, radius-server host, tacacs-server host aaa authorization config-commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands. Syntax aaa authorization config-commands Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the no aaa authorization config-commands command. Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands. Syntax privilege mode {level level command | reset command} To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command.
privilege level (LINE mode) Change the access level for users on the terminal lines. Syntax privilege level level To delete access to a terminal line, use the no privilege level level command. Parameters level level Enter the keyword level then a number for the access level. The range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes. Defaults level = 15 Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
... method2 • enable: use the password the enable password command defines in CONFIGURATION mode. • line: use the password the password command defines in LINE mode. • none: no authentication. • radius: use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius-server host command. • tacacs+: use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server host command. (OPTIONAL) In the event of a “no response” from the first method, the system applies the next configured method.
To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} command. Parameters method-listname Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of a user-configured method list that can be applied to different lines. default Enter the keyword default to specify that the method list specified is the default method for all terminal lines. method Enter one of the following methods: ...
NOTE: If authentication fails using the primary method, the system employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, the system proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.
enable password Change the password for the enable command. Syntax enable password [level level] [encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no enable password [encryption-type] password [level level] command. Parameters level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter a 7 then a text string as the hidden password.
enable restricted Allows Dell Networking technical support to access restricted commands. Syntax enable restricted [encryption-type] password To disallow access to restricted commands, use the no enable restricted command. Parameters encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 as the encryption type. Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router. password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password. Defaults No password is configured. level = 15. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults No authentication is performed on the console lines. Local authentication is performed on the virtual terminal and auxiliary lines. Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you configure the aaa authentication login default command, the login authentication default command automatically is applied to all terminal lines. Related Commands aaa authentication login — selects the login authentication methods.
radius-server key — configures a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS host server. tacacs-server key — configures a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and client. username — establishes an authentication system based on user names. password-attributes Configure the password attributes (strong password).
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced thelockout-period option on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. service password-encryption Encrypt all passwords configured in the system. Syntax service password-encryption To store new passwords as clear text, use the no service passwordencryption command. Defaults Enabled.
show privilege View your access level. Syntax show privilege Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 15 Dell# Related Commands privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — assigns access control to different command modes. show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch.
Example Related Commands Dell#show users Authorization Mode: Line User 0 console 0 admin *3 vty 1 sec1 4 vty 2 ml1 role or privilege Role Privilege sysadmin 15 secadmin 14 netadmin 12 Host(s) Location idle idle 172.31.1.4 idle 172.31.1.5 username — enables a user. timeout login response Specify how long the software waits for the login input (for example, the user name and password) before timing out.
username Establish an authentication system based on user names. Syntax username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret} [encryption-type] password] [privilege level] [role role-name] If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option. To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command. Parameters Defaults 1172 name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command. Related Commands password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. show running-config — views the current configuration.
Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16838. • For the Null interface, enter the keywords null 0. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS server host. Syntax Parameters radius-server host {hostname | ipv4-address} [auth-port portnumber] [retransmit retries] [timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key] hostname Enter the name of the RADIUS server host. ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) of the RADIUS server host. auth-port portnumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords auth-port then a number as the port number. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. The default port-number is 1812.
Usage Information To configure any number of RADIUS server hosts for each server host that is configured, use this command. The system searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software. The global default values for the timeout, retransmit, and key optional parameters are applied, unless those values are specified in the radius-server host or other commands.
Usage Information The key configured on the switch must match the key configured on the RADIUS server daemon. If you configure the key parameter in the radius-server host command, the key configured with the radius-server key command is the default key for all RADIUS communications. Related Commands radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host.
Parameters seconds Defaults 5 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the system times out. The range is from zero (0) to 1000 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host. role Changes command permissions for roles.
role-name Enter a text string for the name of the user role up to 63 characters. These are 3 system defined roles you can modify: secadmin, netadmin, and netoperator. reset Enter the keyword reset to reset all roles back to default for that command. command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or more keywords. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 9.5. (0.
ip tacacs source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for TACACS+ connections. Syntax ip tacacs source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip tacacs source-interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16838.
server. The range is from 0 to 1000. The default is 10 seconds. key key Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key then a string up to 42 characters long as the authentication key. This authentication key must match the key specified in the tacacs-server key for the TACACS+ daemon. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The key configured with this command must match the key configured on the TACACS+ daemon. SSH Server and SCP Commands The Dell Networking OS supports secure shell (SSH) protocol versions 1.5 and 2.0. SSH is a protocol for secure remote login over an insecure network. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication. crypto key generate Generate keys for the SSH server.
Enter key size <1024-2048>. Default<1024>: 1024 Host key already exists. Do you want to replace. [y/n] :y Dell(conf)# Related Commands ip ssh server — enables the SSH server. show crypto — displays the SSH host public keys. debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information. Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server} To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command. Parameters client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To configure the switch as an SCP server, use the ip ssh server command. Related Commands ip ssh server — enables the SSH and SCP server on the switch. ip ssh authentication-retries Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ssh hostbased-authentication Enable hostbased-authentication for the SSHv2 server. Syntax ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable To disable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server, use the no ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
Defaults Key size 768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The server-generated key is used for SSHv1 key-exchange. ip ssh password-authentication Enable password authentication for the SSH server. Syntax ip ssh password-authentication enable To disable password-authentication, use the no ip ssh passwordauthentication enable command.
Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command specifies the file used for the host-based authentication. The creates/ file overwrites the flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/knownhosts file and deletes the user-specified file. Even though this command is a global configuration command, it does not appear in the running configuration because you only need to run this command once.
Defaults The default time is 60 minutes. The default volume is 1024 megabytes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.
ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication enable To disable RSA authentication, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information If you want to log in without being prompted for a password, log in through RSA authentication. To do that, first add the SSHv2 RSA public keys to the list of authorized keys. This command adds the specified RSA keys to the following file: flash://ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys-username (where username is the user associated with this terminal). NOTE: The no form of this command deletes the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ ssh/ authorized-keys-username file.
mac hmacalgorithm • aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server for keying hashing for the message authentication. The following HMAC algorithms are available: • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha2-256-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmacsha1-96.
• diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 port portnumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port then the port number of the listening port of the SSH server. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 22. [version {1 | 2}] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version then the SSH version 1 or 2 to specify only SSHv1 or SSHv2. NOTE: If you enable FIPS mode, you can only select version 2. Defaults Default listening port is 22. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.5(0.
Usage Information This command steps through all active sessions and then displays the accounting records for the active account functions.
798895675496676526500637962218977992760927852363883922305508181 9166009928132616408 664345774602219229518903992966334579117374224743155375050167692 9660273790601494434 050000015179864425629613385774919236081771341059533760063913083 Dell# Related Commands crypto key generate — generates the SSH keys. show ip ssh Display information about established SSH sessions. Syntax show ip ssh Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/ knownhosts file. Example Dell#show ip ssh client-pub-keys poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/ QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui +DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3tReG1 o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc +Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNxPDpEnWIMPJi0 ds= ashwani@poclab4 Dell# Related Commands ip ssh pub-key-file — configures the filename for the host-based authentication.
show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level. Syntax Parameters show role mode {mode} {command} command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or all of the keywords. mode mode Enter keyword then one of the following modes. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Examples Version 9.5(0.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands EXEC Privilege Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The following describes the show user command shown in the following example. Field Description (untitled) Indicates with an asterisk (*) which terminal line you are using. Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. userrole, username ssh Open an SSH connection specifying the host name, username, port number and version of the SSH client. Syntax Parameters ssh {hostname | ipv4 address} [-l username | -p port-number | v {1 | 2}] hostname (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address or the host name of the remote device. ipv4 address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format A.B.C.
Secure DHCP Commands The dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN. After disabling DHCP Snooping, the binding table is deleted and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection are disabled. Related Commands ip dhcp snooping vlan — enables DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs.
interface type For a ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE. Enter the slot and port number of the interface. lease time Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address is leased. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable IP source guard. Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name name Defaults Disabled.
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip dhcp snooping — clears the contents of the DHCP binding table. username Establish an authentication system based on user names.
• 7 to indicate that a password encrypted using a DES hashing algorithm follows. This encryption type is available with the password option only. • 5 to indicate that a password encrypted using an MD5 hashing algorithm follows. This encryption type is available with the secret option only, and is the default encryption type for this option. password Enter a string up to 32 characters long. privilege level Enter the keyword privilege then a number from zero (0) to 15.
inherit existingrole-name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.5(0.0) Enter the inherit keyword then specify the system defined role to inherit permissions from (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator). Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization.
sFlow 48 sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address} agent-addr {ip-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address} agent-addr {ipv4-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] command. Parameters sflow collector ip-address Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) of the sFlow collector device.
sflow enable (Global) Enable sFlow globally. Syntax sflow enable To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, you must enable sFlow on individual interfaces where you want sFlow sampling. Related Commands sflow enable (Global) — enables sFlow on interfaces.
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch only. Syntax sflow extended-switch enable To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
global default counter polling (20 seconds) interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval. sflow polling-interval (Global) Set the sFlow polling interval at a global level. Syntax sflow polling-interval interval value To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command. Parameters interval value Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the interval value in seconds.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value.
show sflow Display the current sFlow configuration. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show sflow [interface] interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
show sflow stack-unit Display the sFlow information on a stack unit. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History show sflow stack-unit {unit number} unit number • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter a unit number to view information on the stack unit in that slot. The range is from 0 to 5. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
49 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. This chapter includes commands for the Dell Networking operating software Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel.
• in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Defaults Debug disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
Related Command show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs. protocol-tunnel destination-mac Overwrite the BPDU destination MAC address with a specific value. Syntax Parameters protocol-tunnel destination-mac xstp address stp Change the default destination MAC address used for L2PT to another value. Defaults The default destination MAC is 01:01:e8:00:00:00. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command. Parameters rate Enter the rate in frames per second. The range is from 75 to 3000. The default is 75. Defaults 75 frames per second. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 LLDP,GVRP MMRP,MVRP LACP,DOT1X OAM,PAUSE E-LMI Gi Gi Gi Gi Gi 5/7,Gi 5/7,Gi 5/7,Gi 5/7,Gi 5/7,Gi 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 5/6 Example (Specific VLAN) Dell#show protocol-tunnel vlan 2 System Rate-Limit: 1000 Frames/second Interface Vlan Protocol(s) Gi1/2 2 STP, PVST Dell# Related Commands show running-config — displays the current configuration.
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. The chapter contains the following sections: • SNMP Commands • Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell Networking OS.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL.
show snmp engineID Display the identification of the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the router. Syntax show snmp engineID Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show snmp engineID Local SNMP engineID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8 Remote Engine ID IP-addr Port 80001F88043132333435 172.31.1.3 5009 80001F88043938373635 172.31.1.
Related Commands snmp-server group — configures an SNMP server group. show snmp user Display the information configured on each SNMP user name. Syntax show snmp user Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
> snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more IF-MIB::ifAlias.134530304 = STRING: This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. This is a port connected to Router2. IF-MIB::ifAlias.134792448 = STRING: snmp-server community Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1 v2 and v3.
• v1v2cwriteu/ v1v2cwriteg — maps to a community with rw (read-write) permissions. The community-name parameter indexes this command. If you do not configure the snmp-server community command, you cannot query SNMP data. Only Standard IPv4 ACL and IPv6 ACL is supported in the optional access-list-name. The command options ipv6, security-name, and access-list-name are recursive.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps. Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notificationoption] To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notificationtype] [notification-option] command. Parameters notificationtype notificationoption Enter the type of notification from the following list: • ecfm — Notification of changes to ECFM.
Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 • linkdown • linkup Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The system supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers. If you do not configure this command, no traps controlled by this command are sent. If you do not specify a notification-type and notification-option, all traps are enabled. Related Commands snmp-server community — enables SNMP and sets the community string.
Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Changing the value of the SNMP Engine ID has important side effects. A user’s password (entered on the command line) is converted to a message digest algorithm (MD5) or secure hash algorithm (SHA) security digest. This digest is based on both the password and the local Engine ID. The command line password is then destroyed, as required by RFC 2274.
• 1 is the least secure version. • 3 is the most secure of the security modes. • 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed. The default is 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet.
snmp-server host Configure the recipient of an SNMP trap operation. Syntax snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c | 3] [auth | no auth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port portnumber] [notification-type] To remove the SNMP host, use the no snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c | 3] [auth | noauth | priv] [community-string] [udp-port number] [notification-type] command.
udp-port portnumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords udp-port then the port number of the remote host to use. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162. notificationtype (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords for the type of trap to send to the host: • ecfm — Notification of ECFM state changes. • entity — Notification of entity changes. • envmon — Environment monitor trap. • eoam — Notificaiton of EOAM state changes. • ets — Notification of ets trap changes.
snmp-server enable command and the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled. NOTE: For v1 / v2c trap configuration, if the community-string is not defined using the snmp-server community command prior to using this command, the default form of the snmp-server community command automatically is configured with the community-name the same as specified in the snmpserver host command. Configuring Informs To send an inform, use the following steps: Related Commands 1.
snmp-server packetsize Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted. Wen the SNMP server is receiving a request or generating a reply, use the snmp-server packetsize global configuration command. Syntax Parameters snmp-server packetsize byte-count byte-count Defaults 8 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter one of the following values 8, 16, 24 or 32. Packet sizes are 8000 bytes, 16000 bytes, 32000 bytes, and 64000 bytes. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands snmp-server community — sets the community string. snmp-server user Configure a new user to an SNMP group.
encrypted (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword encrypted to specify the password appear in encrypted format (a series of digits, masking the true characters of the string). auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. md5 | sha (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword md5 or sha to designate the authentication level.
If you have an encrypted password, you can specify the encrypted string instead of the plain-text password. The following command is an Example of how to specify the command with an encrypted string. NOTE: The number of configurable users is limited to 16.
host and to send packets to the host. Minimum: eight characters long. aes128 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword aes128 to initiate the AES128-CFB encryption algorithm for transmission of SNMP packets. priv-password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent and to decrypt the contents of the message it receives from the agent. Minimum: eight characters long.
Parameters view-name Enter the name of the view (not to exceed 20 characters). oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters). included (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword included to include the MIB family in the view. excluded (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword excluded to exclude the MIB family in the view. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Syslog Commands The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell Networking switches. clear logging Clear the messages in the logging buffer. Syntax clear logging Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show logging — displays logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer.
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging console — sets the logging console parameters. logging extended Logs security and audit events to a system log server. Syntax logging extended Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
default logging monitor Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal. Syntax default logging monitor Defaults level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging monitor — sets the logging monitor parameters. terminal monitor — sends system messages to the terminal/monitor. default logging trap Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. hostname Enter the name of a host already configured and recognized by the switch. udp Enter the keyword udp to enable transmission of log message over UDP followed by port number. The default port is 514 tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable transmission of log message over TCP followed by port number. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 9.5(0.
Defaults level = 7; size = 40960 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you decrease the buffer size, all messages stored in the buffer are lost. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages stored in the buffer. Related Commands clear logging — clears the logging buffer. default logging buffered — returns the logging buffered parameters to the default setting.
logging facility Configure the Syslog facility used for error messages sent to Syslog servers. Syntax logging facility [facility-type] To return to the default values, use the no logging facility command.
Related Commands logging — enables logging to a Syslog server. logging on — enables logging. logging history Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network management station (if configured). Syntax logging history level To return to the default values, use the no logging history command. Parameters level Defaults warnings or 4 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the number of messages reach the limit you set with the logging history size command, older messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table. Related Commands show logging — displays information logged to the history buffer. logging monitor Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications.
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you use the no logging on command, messages are logged only to the console. Related Commands logging — enables logging to the Syslog server. logging buffered — sets the logging buffered parameters. logging console — sets the logging console parameters. logging monitor — sets the logging parameters for the terminal connections.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface configured. Related Commands logging — enables logging to the Syslog server. logging synchronous Synchronize unsolicited messages and output.
Related Commands logging on — enables logging. logging trap Specify which messages are logged to the Syslog server based the message severity. Syntax logging trap [level] To return to the default values, use the default logging trap command. To disable logging, use the no logging trap command. Parameters level Defaults 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.0) Usage Information Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL. To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the log version command in configuration mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
(40960 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Logging to 172.16.1.162 Logging to 10.10.10.4 Logging to 10.1.2.4 Logging to 172.31.1.4 Logging to 133.33.33.4 May 22 10:21:10: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty0 ( 10.11.68.22 )by admin May 22 10:16:35: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty0 ( 10.11.68.22 )by admin May 22 09:39:12: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty0 ( 10.11.68.
defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.. This command displays internal software driver information, which may be useful during troubleshooting switch initialization errors, such as a downed Port-Pipe. show logging auditlog Displays an audit log. Syntax show logging auditlog Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands 1252 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging monitor — sets the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
51 Stacking For more information about using the MXL 10/40GbE Switch stacking feature, refer to the Stacking MXL 10/40GbE Switches chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the MXL 10/40GbE switch stack management unit from rebooting if it fail. Syntax redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit [0–5 | members] To return to the default, use the no redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit [0–5 | members] command.
redundancy force-failover stack-unit Force the standby unit in the stack to become the management unit. Syntax redundancy force-failover stack-unit Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reset stack-unit Reset any designated stack member except the management unit (master unit). Syntax Parameters reset stack-unit 0–5 hard 0–5 Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
--0 1 2 3 4 5 Management Standby Member Member Member Member online online online online online online MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE MXL-10/40GbE 9-1-0-853 9-1-0-853 9-1-0-853 9-1-0-853 9-1-0-853 9-1-0-853 56 56 56 56 56 56 Dell#reset stack-unit ? <0-5> Unit number id Dell#reset stack-unit 0 % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed.
-----------------------------------------------Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 0 Auto Data Sync: Full Failover Type: Hot Failover Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes -- Stack-unit Failover Record ------------------------------------------------Failover Count: 0 Last failover timestamp: None Last failover Reason: None Last failover type: None -- Last Data Block Sync Record: ------------------------------------------------Stack Unit Config: no block sync done Start-up Config
Example Field Description Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone. Interface The unit/port ID of the connected stack port on this unit. Link Speed Link Speed of the stack port (10 or 40) in Gb/s. Admin Status The only currently listed status is Up. Connection The stack port ID to which this unit’s stack port is connected.
1/53 2/33 2/37 2/49 2/53 Related Commands 2/49 0/37 1/33 1/53 0/45 • redundancy disable-auto-reboot — resets the designated stack member. • show hardware stack-unit — displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. • show system — displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. show system stack-unit stack-group Display the stack-groups present/configured for a MXL 10/40GbE switch stack unit.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • reload — reboots the system. • show system — displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. • show system stack-unit stack-group displays the stack-groups present/ configured for a MXL 10/40GbE switch stack unit stack-unit priority Configure the ability of an MXL 10/40GbE switch to become the management unit of a stack.
stack-unit provision Preconfigure a logical stacking ID of a switch that joins the stack. This is an optional command that is executed on the management unit. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Related Commands stack-unit 0–5] provision {MXL-10/40GbE} 0–5 Enter a stack member identifier, from 0 to 5, of the switch that you want to add to the stack. MXL-10/40GbE Enter the model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This identifier is also referred to as the provision type.
When executing this command on the master, the stack reloads. When the members are renumbered, only that specific unit is reset and comes up with the new unit number. Example Dell#stack-unit 0 renumber 2 Renumbering master unit will reload the stack. Proceed to renumber [confirm yes/ no]: Related Commands Stacking • reload — reboots the system. • redundancy disable-auto-reboot — resets the designated stack member.
52 Storm Control The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm. Storm control is supported on the Dell Networking OS Z-Series S4810 S4820T platforms. Important Points to Remember • Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported).
Example Dell#show storm-control broadcast tengigabitethernet 3/24 Broadcast storm control configuration Interface Direction Packets/Second ---------------------------------------TenGig 3/24 Ingress 1000 Dell# show storm-control multicast Display the storm control multicast configuration. Syntax Parameters show storm-control multicast [interface] interface Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.
Parameters interface Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm control configuration: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/ port information.
storm-control broadcast (Interface) Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface. Syntax storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] To disable broadcast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368.
storm-control multicast (Interface) Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on an MXL switch interface (ingress only). Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in To disable multicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control multicast packets_per_second in command. Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368.
storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an MXL switch interface (ingress only). Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] To disable unknown-unicast storm control on the interface, use the no stormcontrol unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554431.
53 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP). bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree. Syntax bridge-priority {priority-value | primary | secondary} To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command. Parameters priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 32768.
Command Modes Command History protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug STP events. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
disable Disable the spanning tree protocol globally on the switch. Syntax disable To enable Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled (that is, the spanning tree protocol is disabled.) Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. portfast bpdufilter default — enters SPANNING TREE mode.
hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command. Parameters seconds Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. portfast bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces. Syntax portfast bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show config Display the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values display. Syntax show config Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(config-stp)#show config protocol spanning-tree 0 no disable Dell(config-stp)# show spanning-tree 0 Display the spanning tree group configuration and status of interfaces in the spanning tree group.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Enable spanning tree group 0 prior to using this command. The following describes the show spanning-tree 0 command shown in the example. Field Description “Bridge Identifier...” Lists the bridge priority and the MAC address for this STP bridge. “Configured hello...” Displays the settings for hello time, max age, and forward delay. “We are...
Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.0a56 Topology change flag set, detected flag set Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0:00:05 ago from GigabitEthernet 1/3 Timers:hold 1, topology change 35 hello 2, max age 20, forward_delay 15 Times:hello 1, topology change 1, notification 0, aging 2 Port 26 (GigabitEthernet 1/1) is Forwarding Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.26 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.
Example (Guard) Field Description Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-onviol ation] | bpdufilter] Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the optional keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU. Enter the optional keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
54 System Time and Date The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, refer to the “Network Time Protocol” section of the Management chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. calendar set Set the time and date for the switch hardware clock.
To manually update the software with the hardware clock, use the clock readcalendar command. Example Dell#calendar set 12:11:00 21 may 2012 Dell# Related Commands clock read-calendar — sets the software clock based on the hardware clock. clock set — sets the software clock. clock update-calendar — sets the hardware clock based on the software clock. show clock — displays the clock settings. clock read-calendar Set the software clock on the switch from the information set in hardware clock (calendar).
month Enter the name of one of the 12 months, in English. You can enter the number of a day and change the order of the display to time day month year. day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time month day year. year Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.
start-day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. start-year Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31.
Parameters time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock output. You can enter up to eight characters. start-week (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for start-day through end-time: week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time. • first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month.
Command History Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. calendar set — sets the hardware clock. clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. show clock — displays the current clock settings. clock timezone Configure a timezone for the switch. Syntax clock timezone timezone-name offset To delete a timezone configuration, use the no clock timezone command.
clock update-calendar Set the switch hardware clock based on the software clock. Syntax clock update-calendar Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Use this command only if you are sure that the hardware clock is inaccurate and the software clock is correct. You cannot delete this command (there is not a no form of this command).
sync Command Modes Command History Enter the keyword sync to display information on the NTP clock synchronization. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp authenticate Enable authentication of NTP traffic between the switch and the NTP time serving hosts. Syntax ntp authenticate To disable NTP authentication, use the no ntp authentication command. Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.
0 Specify that authentication key is entered in an unencrypted format (default). 7 Specify that the authentication key is entered in DES encrypted format. key Enter the authentication key in the previously specified format. Defaults NTP authentication is not configured by default. If you do not specify the option [0 | 7], 0 is selected by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ntp disable Prevent an interface from receiving NTP packets. Syntax ntp disable To re-enable NTP on an interface, use the no ntp disable command. Defaults Disabled (that is, if you configure an NTP host, all interfaces receive NTP packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp multicast client To receive NTP information from the network via multicast, configure the switch.
hostname Enter the hostname of the server. key keyid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key and a number as the NTP peer key. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. prefer (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefer to indicate that this peer has priority over other servers. version number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version and a number to correspond to the NTP version used on the server. The range is from 1 to 3. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.
• Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp trusted-key Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP synchronizes. Syntax ntp trusted-key number To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command. Parameters number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.
Parameters minutes Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes between updates from NTP to the hardware clock. The range is from 1 to 1440. The default is 60 minutes. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show calendar Display the current date and time based on the switch hardware clock. Syntax show calendar Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8.3.16.
Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show clock 12:30:04.402 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Dell# Example (Detail) Dell#show clock detail 12:30:26.892 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Time source is RTC hardware Summer time starts 00:00:00 UTC Wed Mar 14 2012 Summer time ends 00:00:00 pacific Wed Nov 7 2012 Dell# Related Commands clock summer-time recurring — displays the time and date from the switch hardware clock.
Field Description st Displays the peer’s stratum, that is, the number of hops away from the external time source. A 16 in this column means the NTP peer cannot reach the time source. when Displays the last time the switch received an NTP packet. poll Displays the polling interval (in seconds). reach Displays the reachability to the peer (in octal bitstream). delay Displays the time interval or delay for a packet to complete a round-trip to the NTP time source (in milliseconds).
Field Description “Clock is...” States whether the switch clock is synchronized, which NTP stratum the system is assigned and the IP address of the NTP peer. “frequency is...” Displays the frequency (in ppm), stability (in ppm) and precision (in Hertz) of the clock in this system. “reference time is...” Displays the reference time stamp. “clock offset is...” Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock. “root dispersion is...
55 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on the MXL platform. tunnel-mode Enable a tunnel interface. Syntax tunnel mode {ipip | ipv6 | ipv6ip}[decapsulate-any] To disable an active tunnel interface, use the no tunnel mode command. Parameters ipip Enable tunnel in RFC 2003 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv4 tunnel. ipv6 Enable tunnel in RFC 2473 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv6 tunnel.
Configuration of IPv6 commands over decapsulate-any tunnel causes an error. tunnel source Set a source address for the tunnel. Syntax tunnel source {ip-address | ipv6–address | interface-typenumber} To delete the current tunnel source address, use the no tunnel source command. Parameters ip-address Enter the source IPv4 address in A.B.C.D format. ipv6–address Enter the source IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format.
tunnel keepalive Configure the tunnel keepalive target, interval and attempts. Syntax tunnel keepalive {ip-address | ipv6-address}[interval {seconds}] [attempts {count | unlimited}] Use the no tunnel keepalive command to disable tunnel keepalive probes. Parameters ip-address ipv6 address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the peer to which the keepalive probes will be sent.
delete to succeed. If the address and mask are not specified, this command deletes all allow-remote entries. Parameters ip-address Enter the source IPv4 address in A.B.C.D format. ipv6–address Enter the source IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D to match a range of remote addresses. The default mask is /32 for IPv4 addresses and /128 for IPv6 addresses, which match only the specified address.
Defaults 0 (Mapped) Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command configures the method used to set the high 6 bits (the differentiated services codepoint) of the IPv4 TOS or the IPv6 traffic class in the outer IP header. A value of 0 copies original packet DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) to the tunnel header DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) depending on the mode of tunnel.
tunnel flow-label Configure the method to set the IPv6 flow label value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel flow-label value To return to the default value of 0, use the no tunnel flow-label value command. Parameters value Enter a value to set the IPv6 flow label value in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 1048575. The default value is 0.
Usage Information A value of 0 copies the inner packet hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) in the encapsulated packet to the tunnel header hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value. ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel will borrow its address. Syntax ip unnumbered {interface-type interface-number} Use the no ip unnumbered command to set the tunnel back to default logical address.
ipv6 unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IPv6 address and select the interface from which the tunnel will borrow its address. Syntax ipv6 unnumbered {interface-type interface-number} Use the no ipv6 unnumbered command to set the tunnel back to default logical address. If the tunnel was previously operational, this will make the tunnel interface operationally down, unless the tunnel also has an IPv4 address configured.
56 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) MXL 10/40GbE Switch Module platform. To access this mode, press any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot. Hit any key to stop autoboot: Enter u-Boot immediately, as the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: This chapter describes only a few commands available in u-Boot mode. NOTE: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
boot show net config retries Show the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot show net config retries Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER# boot show net config retries Number of Network Boot Config Retries is : 0 BOOT_USER # boot write net config retries Set the number of retries for network boot configuration failure.
default gateway Set the default gateway IP address. Syntax default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. enable Change the access privilege level. Syntax enable [user | admin] Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. help Display the help menu. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Command History Example 1304 Version 8.3.16.
default-gateway - set the default gateway ip address enable [user|admin] change access privilege level help display help menu -(36%)-Use to continue, q to stop: BOOT_USER # ignore enable password Ignore the enabled password. Syntax ignore enable-password Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ignore startup config Ignore the system startup configuration.
no default-gateway Clear the default gateway IP address. Syntax no default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. no interface management ethernet ip address Clear the management port IP address and mask. Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reload Reload the MXL switch.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show boot blc ? Total 1 possible command found. Possible command list: show boot blc show the boot loop counter value BOOT_USER # show boot blc Boot Loop Counter : 10 BOOT_USER # show boot selection Display the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition. Syntax show boot selection Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.0bt1 Created Tue May 1 10:56:16 2012 by build on login-sjc-01 Bootflash Partition B: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.0bt1 Created Tue May 1 10:56:16 2012 by build on login-sjc-01 Boot Selector Partition: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_XLOAD_LP_IMG_BOOT_SELECTOR, BSP Release 4.0.0.
show default-gateway Display the default gateway IP address. Syntax show default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Gateway IP address: 15.0.0.1 BOOT_USER # show interface management Ethernet Show the management port IP address and mask. Syntax show interface management ethernet Command Modes uBoot Command History Example Version 8.3.16.
Management ethernet Port Configuration: 100M Management ethernet Port Configuration: full duplex BOOT_USER # syntax help Show the syntax information. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Command History Example 1310 Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) 57 Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. clear ufd-disable Re-enable one or more downstream interfaces on the switch/router that are in a UFD-Disabled Error state so that an interface can send and receive traffic.
• upstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. debug uplink-state-group Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups. Syntax debug uplink-state-group [group-id] To turn off debugging event messages, enter the no debug uplink-stategroup [group-id] command.
uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature Related Commands uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. Syntax downstream interface To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no downstream interface command.
Related Commands • downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • upstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream auto-recover Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in an uplink-state group automatically come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up.
all Brings down all downstream links in the group. Defaults All Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. A user-configurable number of downstream interfaces in an uplink-state group are put into a link-down state with an UFD-Disabled error message when one upstream interface in an uplink-state group goes down.
show running-config uplink-state-group Display the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups. Syntax Parameters show running-config uplink-state-group [group-id] group-id Defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands Version 8.3.16.1 Displays the current configuration of all uplink-state groups or a specified group. The valid group-id values are from 1 to 16. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no uplink-state-group group-id command. To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command in Uplink-State-Group Configuration mode. Parameters group-id Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the ID number of an uplink-state group. The range is from 1 to 16. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module..
• 10 Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/ port | slot/port-range} • 40 Gigabit Ethernet: fortygigabitethernet {slot/ port | slot/port-range} • Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | portchannel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and portrange entry.
58 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. For more information about basic VLAN commands, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in the Layer 2 chapter.
dei honor Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to a system drop precedence. Enter the command once for 0 and once for 1. Syntax Parameters dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. • Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as besteffort.
Command Modes Command History INTERFACE Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect. Related Commands dei enable — enables DEI. member Assign a stackable VLAN access or trunk port to a VLAN. The VLAN must contain the vlan-stack compatible command in its configuration. Syntax member interface To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command.
show interface dei-honor Display the dei honor configuration. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show interface dei-honor [interface slot/port] interface slot/ port Enter the interface type then the line card slot and port number. EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands dei mark — sets the DEI value on egress. vlan-stack access Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as an access port to the stackable VLAN network. Syntax vlan-stack access To remove access port designation, use the no vlan-stack access command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs * NUM 1 2 Status Inactive Active 3 Active 4 Active 5 Active Dell# Q Ports M M M M M M M M M M M Gi 13/13 Gi 13/0-2 Po1(Gi 13/14-15) Gi 13/18 Gi 13/3 Po1(Gi 13/14-15) Gi 13/18 Gi 13/4 Po1(Gi 13/14-15) Gi 13/18 Gi 13/5 vlan-stack dot1p-mapping Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value. You can separate the C-Tag values by commas and dashed ranges are permitted.
Parameters number Enter the hexadecimal number as the stackable VLAN tag. You may specify both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID. The range is from 0 to FFFF. The default is 9100. Defaults 0x9100 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
tagged VLANs. When the VLAN-Stack trunk port is also a member of an untagged VLAN, the port must be in Hybrid mode. Refer to portmode hybrid. In the first example, a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then also made part of a single-tagged VLAN. In the second example, the tag protocol identifier (TPID) is set to 8848.
Dell(config)#interface tenGigabitethernet 8/0 Dell(conf-if-te-10/0)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-10/0)#portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-10/0)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-10/0)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-te-10/0)#exit Dell(config)#interface vlan 10 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vlan)#member Gi 7/0, Gi 3/10, TenGi 8/0 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#exit Dell(config)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged TenGi 8/0 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#exit Dell(config)# Dell(config)#interface vlan 40 Dell(con
Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) 59 VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History clear ip mroute {group-address [source-address] | * | snooping} group-address [sourceaddress] Enter the multicast group address and source address (if desired), in dotted decimal format, to clear information on a specific group. * Enter * to clear all multicast routes.
lacp ungroup member-independent vlt Prevent possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain. Syntax lacp ungroup member-independent vlt Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. peer-routing Enable L3 VLT peer-routing. This command is applicable for both IPV6/ IPV4. Syntax peer-routing To disable L3 VLT peer-routing, use the no peer-routing command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Command History Version 9.4(0.0) Added the IPV6/IPV4 support on the MXL. Version 9.2(0.
primary-priority Reconfigure the primary role of VLT peer switches. Syntax Parameters primary-priority value value Default 32768 Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) To configure the primary role on a VLT peer, enter a lower value than the priority value of the remote peer. The range is from 1 to 65535. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Enter a multicast group address and, optionally, a source multicast address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM-SM snooping discovers for a specified multicast group and source. Command Modes Command History Usage Information summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view routes in a tabular format. vlt (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlt to view multicast routes with a spanned incoming interface.
(*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:04:16 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 4/11 GigabitEthernet 4/13 (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:03:17 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 4/11 GigabitEthernet 4/13 GigabitEthernet 4/20 GigabitEthernet 4/13 GigabitEthernet 4/20 Example (detail) Dell#show ip mroute IP Multicast Routing Table (*, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:05:12 Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 3/12 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 3/13 (1.13.1.
UDP Port: 34998 HeartBeat Messages Sent: 634 HeartBeat Messages Received: 473 show vlt brief Displays summarized status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch. Syntax show vlt brief Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Brief) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell# show vlt detail Local LAG Id Peer LAG Id Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------ ----------- ------------128 128 UP UP 1000 Dell# show vlt inconsistency Display deviations in VLT multicast traffic. Syntax show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
3000 Dell# L3 -- show vlt role Displays the VLT peer status, role of the local VLT switch, VLT system MAC address and system priority, and the MAC address and priority of the local VLT device. Syntax show vlt role Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:65, L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:82, L2 Reg Request sent:17 L2 Reg Request rcvd:15 L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:88 L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:61 L2 Reg Response sent:12 L2 Reg Response rcvd:11 VLT Igmp-Snooping Not Enabled VLT ARP Statistics -------------------ARP Tunnel Pkts sent:0 ARP Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 ARP Tunnel Pkts sent Non Vlt:0 ARP Tunnel Pkts Rcvd Non Vlt:0 ARP-sync Pkts Sent:0 ARP-sync Pkts Rcvd:0 ARP Reg Request sent:18 ARP Reg Request rcvd:16 VLT NDP Statistics
Command Modes Command History Usage Information VLT DOMAIN Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. When you create a VLT domain on a switch, the system automatically creates a VLT-system MAC address used for internal system operations. To explicitly define the MAC address for the domain, use the system-mac command. You must also reconfigure the same MAC address on the VLT peer switch.
vlt domain Enable VLT on a switch, configure a VLT domain, and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History vlt domain domain-id domain-id Enter the Domain ID number. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch. VLT uses the domain ID to automatically create a VLT MAC address for the domain. The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information If you add an ICL or VLTi link as a member of a primary VLAN, the ICL becomes a part of the primary VLAN and its associated secondary VLANs, similar to the behavior for normal trunk ports. VLAN symmetricity is not validated if you associate an ICL to a PVLAN. Similarly, if you dissociate an ICL from a PVLAN, although the PVLAN symmetrictiy exists, ICL is removed from that PVLAN in such a case. The ICL Status field denotes the type of the VLAN port of the VLTi link configured in a PVLAN.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 60 Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) for IPv4 and IPv6. The following commands apply to both VRRP IPv4 and IPv6: • advertise-interval • description • disable • hold-time • preempt • priority • show config • track • virtual-address VRRP Ipv6 are in the VRRP for IPv6 Commands section. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell Networking OS recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges. Syntax authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password To delete an authentication type and password, use the no authenticationtype command.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug vrrp Allows you to enable debugging of VRRP. Syntax debug vrrp interface [vrrp-id] {all | packets | state | timer} To disable debugging, use the no debug vrrp interface [vrrp-id] {all | packets | state | timer} command.
description Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group. Syntax description text To delete a VRRP group description, use the no description command. Parameters text Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes VRRP Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Disable a VRRP group. Syntax disable To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled.
Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is zero (0) seconds. centisecs centisecs Enter the keyword centisecs then the number of centisecs in units of 25 centisecs. The range is from 0 to 65525 in units of 25 centisecs. Defaults zero (0) seconds Command Modes VRRP Command History Version 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for centisecs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters priority Defaults 100 Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the priority. Enter 255 only if the router’s virtual address is the same as the interface’s primary IP address (that is, the router is the OWNER). The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show vrrp View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the system returns No Active VRRP group. Syntax Parameters show vrrp [vrrp-id] [interface] [brief] vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the Virtual Router Identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: brief Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.
Item Example (Brief) Description • NA/IF (the interface is not available). • MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router). • BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router). Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router. Virtual addr(s) Displays the virtual IP addresses of the VRRP routers associated with the interface.
Item Example Description • Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the interface. • Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface. • Gratuitous ARP sent displays the number of gratuitous ARPs sent. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected. Authentication:...
track Monitor an interface and lower the priority value of the VRRP group on that interface if it is disabled. Syntax track interface [priority-cost cost] To disable monitoring, use the no track interface command. Parameters interface cost Defaults cost = 10 Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
... ip-address12 Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 11 additional IP addresses of virtual routers in dotted decimal format. Separate the IP addresses with a space. The IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is configured.
Related Command • When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP. • When an interface comes up, whether as part of a system reload or an interface reload, the system waits 300 seconds (5 minutes) to bring up VRRP on that interface. vrrp delay reload — sets the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot. vrrp delay reload Set the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot.
Parameters vrrp-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8.3.16.1 Enter a number as the group ID. The range is from 1 to 255. Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets. Related Command virtual-address — assigns up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group.
debug vrrp ipv6 Allows you to enable debugging of VRRP. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information debug vrrp ipv6 interface [vrid] {all | packets | state | timer} interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
interface brief Command Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For SONET interfaces, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Line Beginning with Example Description • Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the interface. • Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface. • Bad pkts rcvd displays the number of invalid packets received on the interface. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected. Tracking states...
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a link-local virtual IP address is configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets. • When VRF microcode is not loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is the same as the VRID number configured with the vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6group command.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.5(0.0) Usage Information Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. You can use the version both command to migrate from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3.
61 ICMP Message Types This chapter lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 1. ICMP Messages and Their Definitions Symbol Type Code . Query Error Timeout (no reply) ! 0 U 3 C Description 4 5 ICMP Message Types 3 echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable .
Symbol & Type Code Description 0 redirect for network . 1 redirect for host . 2 redirect for type-of-service and network . 3 redirect for type-of-service and host . 8 0 echo request . 9 0 router advertisement . 10 0 router solicitation . 11 Error time exceeded: 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 1362 Query parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing .
62 SNMP Traps This chapter lists the traps sent by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Each trap is listed by the fields Message ID, Trap Type, and Trap Option. Table 2.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option SNMP NONE SNMP NONE NONE NONE ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID RMON_HC_RISHING_THRESHOLD %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_RISING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacit
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE %CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD: Memory %s usage above threshold. MemUsage (%d) CHM_MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR %CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR: Memory %s usage drops below threshold.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ETS NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: ETS Oper state changed to recommended for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: ETS Oper state changed to rxConfigSrc for port %s ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to enabled for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to disabled fo
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE ENTITY NONE %FCOE-5-MAX_ENODE_LIMIT_RCH: Number of ENodes reached maximum allowed limit in the system FIPS_MAX_SESSION_LIMIT_RCH %FCOE-5-MAX_SESSION_LIMIT_RCH: Number of sessions reached maximum allowed limit in the system FIPS_FCF_DROP %FCOE-5-FCF_DROP: New FCF(%d,%s) discovered in Vlan %d is dropped as max-FCF-limit per VLAN is reached FIPS_ENODE_DROP %FCOE-5-ENODE_DROP: New ENode(%d,%s) discovered in interfa
63 FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module. FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module.
the dcb-buffer-threshold configuration is present on a stack port or any interface, the dcb-input or dcbouput policies cannot be applied on those interfaces.
Usage Information A DCB map is a template used to configure DCB parameters and apply them on converged Ethernet interfaces. DCB parameters include priority-based flow control (PFC) and enhanced traffic selection (ETS). To display the PFC and ETS settings in DCB maps, enter the show qos dcb-map command. Use the dcb-map command to create a DCB map to specify PFC and ETS settings and apply it on Ethernet ports.
Defaults None Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch module platform. PFC and ETS settings are not pre-configured on Ethernet ports. You must use the dcb-map command to configure different groups of 802.1p priorities with PFC and ETS settings. Using the priority-pgid command, you assign each 802.1p priority to one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.
strict-priority Configure the priority-group traffic to be handled with strict priority scheduling. Strict-priority traffic is serviced first, before bandwidth allocated to other priority groups is made available. pfc {on | off} Configure whether priority-based flow control is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for port traffic in the priority group. Defaults None Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
show dcb-map Display the DCB configuration parameters in DCB maps. FC Flex IO Modules with MXL Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show dcb-map brief dcb-map-name brief Displays an overview of currently configured DCB maps and the operational status of the ports on which they are applied. dcb-mapname Displays the DCB configuration parameters in a specified map that is applied on Ethernet (FCoE) ports. • • EXEC EXEC Privilege Version 9.3(0.
dcbmapABC dcbmapXYZ te 0/1 te 0/2 Active Not active Dell# show dcb-map dcbmapABC Priority-Group Table: Priority-Group Priorities 0 0,1,2,5,6,7 1 3 2 4 3 5 6 7 PFC Enabled priorities: 3, 4 Related Commands 50 30 20 Bandwidth(%) dcb-map — creates a DCB map to configure DCB parameters on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic. show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map.
Example Field Description TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used by the priority group: Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS). BW Percentage of bandwidth allocated to the priority group. PFC PFC setting for the priority group: On (enabled) or Off. Priorities 802.1p priorities configured in the priority group.
DCBX Commands The following DCBX commands are supported on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch platforms. advertise dcbx-appln-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the application priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} To remove the application priority TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-applntlv {fcoe | iscsi} command.
Defaults All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time; for example: advertise dcbx-tlv ets-conf ets-reco. You can enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (ets-conf).
Command History Usage Information Version 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch. To verify the DCBX configuration on a port, use the show interface dcbx detail command. dcbx version Configure the DCBX version used on the interface. Syntax dcbx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.
To disable DCBX debugging, use the no debug dcbx command. Parameters {all | autodetect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9.3.0.0 Enter the type of debugging, where: • all: enables all DCBX debugging operations. • auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBX autodetect timers. • config-exchng: enables traces for DCBX configuration exchanges. • fail: enables traces for DCBX failures.
iscsi priority-bits Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured iSCSI priority, use the no iscsi priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3.0.0 Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF.
FC Flex IO Modules Field Description DCBX Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBX operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status. Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBX configuration source on the switch: true (yes) or false (no). Local DCBX Compatibility mode DCBX version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible.
Example Field Description Peer DCBX Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Total DCBX Frames transmitted Number of DCBX frames sent from the local port. Total DCBX Frames received Number of DCBX frames received from the remote peer port. Total DCBX Frame errors Number of DCBX frames with errors received.
DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 ETS Commands The following ETS commands are supported on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch platform. bandwidth-percentage Configure the bandwidth percentage allocated to priority traffic in port queues.
sum of configured bandwidth allocation to dot1p priority traffic in all ETS priority groups must be 100%. Allocate at least 1% of the total bandwidth to each priority group and queue. If bandwidth is assigned to some priority groups but not to others, the remaining bandwidth (100% minus assigned bandwidth amount) is equally distributed to nonstrict-priority groups which have no configured scheduler. Related Commands • qos-policy-output ets — creates a QoS output policy.
Usage Information A DCB map is a template used to configure DCB parameters and apply them on converged Ethernet interfaces. DCB parameters include priority-based flow control (PFC) and enhanced traffic selection (ETS). To display the PFC and ETS settings in DCB maps, enter the show qos dcb-map command. Use the dcb-map command to create a DCB map to specify PFC and ETS settings and apply it on Ethernet ports.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Use the dcb-map command to configure priority groups with PFC and/or ETS settings and apply them to Ethernet interfaces. Use the priority-pgid command to map 802.1p priorities to a priority group. You can assign each 802.1p priority to only one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.
• werr: weighted elastic round robin (werr) provides lowlatency scheduling for priority traffic on port queues. Defaults Weighted elastic round robin (WERR) scheduling is used to queue priority traffic. Command Modes POLICY-MAP-OUT-ETS Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch. dot1p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled to the current queue mapping.
show interface ets Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface, including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show interface port-type slot/port ets {summary | detail} port-type slot/ port ets Enter the port-type slot and port ETS information. {summary | detail} Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results.
Example (Summary) FC Flex IO Modules Field Description Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including admin mode (enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer), priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: • Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. • Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from the peer.
1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters: -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0
Example Dell# show qos dcb-output dcb-output ets priority-group san qos-policy san priority-group ipc qos-policy ipc priority-group lan qos-policy lan show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group. Syntax show qos priority-groups Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Version 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch.
-----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 - PFC Commands The following PFC commands are supported on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch platfor
Command Modes Command History Usage Information EXEC Privilege Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. If you do not use the statistics parameter, both hardware and DCBx counters clear. description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters.
Usage Information The minimum link delay must be greater than the round-trip transmission time a peer must honor a PFC pause frame multiplied by the number of PFC-enabled ingress ports. Related Commands dcb-input — creates a DCB input policy. pfc mode on Enable the PFC configuration on the port so that the priorities are included in DCBX negotiation with peer PFC devices. Syntax pfc mode on To disable the PFC configuration, use the no pfc mode on command. Defaults PFC mode is on.
Defaults No lossless queues are configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on the switch is two. • The following lists the dot1p priority-queue assignments.
Usage Information You can enable any number of 802.1p priorities for PFC. Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default. Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap (going down and coming up) when you reconfigure the lossless queues for no-drop priorities in a PFC input policy and reapply the policy to an interface. The maximum number of lossless queues supported on the switch is two. A PFC peer must support the configured priority traffic (as DCBX detects) to apply PFC.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. To clear the PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters interface port-type slot/port command. The following describes the show interface pfc summary command shown in the following example. 1398 Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number.
Example (Summary) FC Flex IO Modules Field Description Application Priority TLV: FCOE TLV Tx Status Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: SCSI TLV Tx Status Status of ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: Local FCOE Priority Map Priority bitmap the local DCBX port uses in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs.
ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/49 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/49 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PFC DCBX Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priorit
6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 show qos dcb-input Displays the PFC configuration in a DCB input policy. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Example show qos dcb-input [pfc-profile] pfc-profile Enter the PFC profile. CONFIGURATION Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10/40GbE Switch.
stack unit 1 stack-port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Local is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Link Delay 45556 pause quantum 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts Fibre Channel over Ethernet for FC Flex IO Modules FCoE provides a converged Ethernet network that allows the combination of storage-area network (SAN) and LAN traffic on a Layer 2 link by encapsulating Fibre Channel data into Ethernet frames.
dcb-map Create a DCB map to configure priority flow control (PFC) and enhanced transmission selection (ETS) on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic. Apply the DCB map to an Ethernet interface. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax Parameters dcb-map map-name map-name Enter a DCB map name. The maximum number of alphanumeric characters is 32. Defaults None.
description (for FCoE maps) In an FCoE map, add a text description of the FCoE and FC parameters used to transmit storage traffic over an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway in a converged fabric. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax Parameters description text text Defaults None Command Modes FCOE MAP Command History Version 9.3(0.0) Enter a maximum of 32 characters.
gateway so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network. When applied to FC and Ethernet ports on an NPIV proxy gateway, an FCoE map allows the switch to operate as an FCoE-FC bridge between an FC SAN and an FCoE network by providing FCoE-enabled servers and switches with the necessary parameters to log in to a SAN fabric. Use the fcoe-map command to create an FCoE map.
Usage Information In the fabric-id vlan command, the fabric and VLAN ID numbers must be the same. In each FCoE map, the fabric ID, FC-MAP value, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. To remove a fabric-VLAN association from an FCoE map, enter the no fabric-id vlan command. You must first create a VLAN and then specify the configured VLAN ID in the fabric-id vlan command. Otherwise, the following error message is displayed.
Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. fc-map In an FCoE map, configure the FCoE mapped address prefix (FC-MAP) value which is used to identify FCoE traffic transmitted on the FCoE VLAN for the specified fabric.
fcoe priority-bits Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured FCoE priority, use the no fcoe priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Defaults 0x8 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.3.0.0 Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric. An FCoE map is used to virtualize upstream FC ports on an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network.
Command Modes Command History FCOE MAP Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information To delete the FIP keepalive time period from an FCoE map, enter the no fkaadv-erpiod command. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps.
When you apply an FCoE map to a server-facing Ethernet port, the port is automatically configured as a tagged member of the FCoE VLAN. For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure them, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section of the Layer 2 chapter. Example (Single Range) FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 10 FTOS(conf-if-vl-3)# Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric.
priority-group bandwidth pfc Configure the ETS bandwidth allocation and PFC mode used to manage port traffic in an 802.1p priority group. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax Parameters priority-group group-num {bandwidth percentage| strictpriority} pfc {on | off} priority-group group-num Enter the keyword priority-group followed by the number of an 802.1p priority group. Use the prioritypgid command to create the priority groups in a DCB map.
If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth, the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups. To remove a priority-group configuration in a DCB map, enter the no prioritygroup bandwidth pfc command. By default, equal bandwidth is assigned to each dot1p priority in a priority group. Use the bandwidth parameter to configure the bandwidth percentage assigned to a priority group.
module FC ports so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE Forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network. The following table describes the show fcoe-map brief output shown in the example below. Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric. Fabric ID The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded. VLAN ID The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic between servers and a fabric over the NPIV proxy gateway.
Example Field Description FC-MAP FCoE MAC address-prefix value - The unique 24-bit MAC address prefix that identifies a fabric. FKA-ADV-period Time interval (in seconds) used to transmit FIP keepalive advertisements. FCF Priority The priority used by a server to select an upstream FCoE forwarder.
show npiv devices Display the FCoE and FC devices currently logged in to an M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway. M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show npiv devices [brief] brief • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version 9.3(0.
Field Description FDISC - ENode logged in using a fabric discovery (FDISC). Status Example Operational status of the link between a server CNA port and a SAN fabric: Logged In - Server has logged in to the fabric and is able to transmit FCoE traffic.
Example Related Commands Field Description FCoE MAC Fabric-provided MAC address (FPMA). The FPMA consists of the FC-MAP value in the FCoE map and the FC-ID provided by the fabric after a successful FLOGI. In the FPMA, the most significant bytes are the FC-MAP; the least significant bytes are the FC-ID. FC-ID FC port ID provided by the fabric. LoginMethod Method used by the server CNA to log in to the fabric; for example, FLOGI or FDISC. Secs Number of seconds that the fabric connection is up.
64 PMUX Mode of the MXL 10/40GbE Switch I/O Module This chapter describes the various CLI commands applicable in PMUX mode. Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) commands for data center bridging features include 802.
Usage Information To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise dcbx-appln-tlv iscsi. advertise dcbx-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-tlv {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} [ets-conf | etsreco | pfc] [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] To remove the advertised ETS TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-tlv command.
Parameters percentage (Optional) Enter the bandwidth percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Defaults none Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT-ETS Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By default, equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. DCB is not supported if you enable link-level flow control on one or more interfaces. dcb-input To apply pause or flow control for specified priorities using a configure delay time, create a DCB input policy.
Related Commands dcb-policy input — applies the input policy with the PFC configuration. dcb-output To associate an ETS configuration with priority traffic, create a DCB output policy. Syntax dcb-output policy-name To remove the ETS output policy globally, use the no dcb output policy-name command. Parameters policy-name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 8.3.16.1 Enter the DCB output policy name. The maximum is 32 alphanumeric characters.
Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you apply an input policy with PFC disabled (no pfc mode on): • You can enable link-level flow control on the interface. To delete the input policy, first disable link-level flow control.
To remove only the DCB input policies applied to the specified switch, use the no dcb-policy input stack-unit command. Parameters stack-unit-id Enter the stack unit identification. dcb-inputpolicy-name Enter the policy name for the DCB input policy. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information When you apply an ETS output policy to on interface, ETS-configured scheduling and bandwidth allocation take precedence over any configured settings in QoS output policies. To remove an ETS output policy from an interface, use the no dcb-policy output policy-name command. ETS is enabled by default with the default ETS configuration applied (all dot1p priorities in the same group with equal bandwidth allocation).
You can apply a DCB output policy with ETS configuration to all stacked ports in a switch stack or an individual stacked switch. You can apply different DCB output policies to different stack units. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4.(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future.
dcb stack-unit pfc-buffering pfc-port-count pfc-queues Configure the PFC buffer for all port pipes in a specified stack unit by specifying the port-pipe number, number of PFC-enabled ports, and number of configured lossless queues.
To remove DCBX port role, use the no dcbx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} command. Parameters config-source | autodownstream | auto-upstream | manual Enter the DCBX port role, where: • config-source: configures the port to serve as the configuration source on the switch. • auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from auto-upstream ports.
• ieee-v2: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1az (Draft 2.5). Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch.
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters. Defaults none Command Modes • DCB INPUT POLICY • DCB OUTPUT POLICY Command History Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Usage Information If you disable ETS in an output policy applied to an interface using the no ets mode on command, any previously configured QoS settings at the interface or global level takes effect. If you configure QoS settings at the interface or global level and in an output policy map (the service-policy output command), the QoS configuration in the output policy takes precedence.
Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is available at the global level only. pfc link-delay Configure the link delay used to pause specified priority traffic. Syntax pfc link-delay value To remove the link delay, use the no pfc link-delay command.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information DCB INPUT POLICY Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Description heading 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 pfc priority Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay. Syntax pfc priority priority-range To delete the pfc priority configuration, use the no pfc priority command. Parameters priority-range Defaults none Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY Command History Usage Information Enter the 802.1p values of the frames to be paused.
NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future. Related Commands dcb-input — creates a DCB input policy. priority-group To use with an ETS output policy, create an ETS priority group. Syntax priority-group group-name To remove the priority group, use the no priority-group command.
Related Commands • priority-list — configures the 802.1p priorities for an ETS output policy. • set-pgid — configures the priority-group. priority-group qos-policy Associate the 802.1p priority traffic in a priority group with the ETS configuration in a QoS output policy. Syntax priority-group group-name qos-policy ets-policy-name To remove the 802.1p priority group, use the no priority-group qos-policy command. Parameters group-name Enter the group name of the 802.1p priority group.
priority-list Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. Syntax priority-list value To remove the priority list, use the no priority-list command. Parameters value Enter the priority list value. Separate priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, priority-list 3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.
Command Modes Command History Usage Information CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information dot1p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled to the current queue mapping. dot1p priorities within the same queue must have the same traffic properties and scheduling method. ETS-assigned scheduling applies only to data queues, not to control queues. The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict-queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group.
show dcb Displays the data center bridging status, the number of PFC-enabled ports, and the number of PFCenabled queues. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] unit number Enter the DCB unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
The following describes the show interface dcbx detail command shown in the following example. 1442 Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number. Port-Role Configured the DCBX port role: auto-upstream, autodownstream, config-source, or manual. DCBX Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration.
Example Field Description Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer device.
DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 show interface ets Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface, including priority groups
Example (Summary) Field Description Admin mode ETS mode: on or off. When on, the scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a DCBX TLV from a peer can take effect on an interface. Admin Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation.
Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -----------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters: -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Bandwidth 13% 13% 13% 13% 12% 12% 12% 12% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status
{summary | detail} Command Modes Command History Usage Information Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results. INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. To clear the PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters interface port-type slot/port command.
Example (Summary) Field Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBX exchanges of the PFC parameters: Feature — for legacy DCBX versions; Symmetric — for an IEEE version. TLV Tx Status Status of the PFC TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. PFC Link Delay Link delay (in quanta) used to pause specified priority traffic. Application Priority TLV: FCOE TLV Tx Status Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port: enabled or disabled.
Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBX Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/49 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/49 Admin mode is
-------------------------------------------------------0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 show qos dcb-input Displays the PFC configuration in a DCB input policy. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Command History Usage Information Example show qos dcb-input [pfc-profile] pfc-profile Enter the PFC profile. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Example Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future.
Command Modes Command History Example CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters Command Modes Command History Example stack-unit Enter the stack unit. port-number Enter the port number. CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
fcf-macaddress Command Modes Command History Enter the FCF MAC address to be cleared of FIP snooping information. EXEC Privilege Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fipsnooping enable command. Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs.
Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fip-snooping port-mode fcf Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. Syntax fip-snooping port-mode fcf To disable the bridge-to-FCF link on a port, use the no fip-snooping portmode fcf command. Command Modes Command History Usage Information INTERFACE Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information You can configure iSCSI TLVs to send either globally or on a specified interface. The interface configuration takes priority over global configuration. iscsi aging time Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Syntax iscsi aging time time To remove the iSCSI session aging time, use the no iscsi aging time command. Parameters time Defaults 10 minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Enter the aging time for the iSCSI session. The range is from 5 to 43,200 minutes.
dscp dscpvalue Enter the DSCP value assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The valid range is from 0 to 63. The default is: the DSCP value in ingress packets is not changed. remark Marks the incoming iSCSI packets with the configured dot1p or DSCP value when they egress to the switch. The default is: the dot1and DSCP values in egress packets are not changed. Defaults The default dot1p VLAN priority value is 4 without the remark option.
Defaults 4 (0x10 in the bitmap) Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP (only on the global, not on the interface) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi profile-compellant Configure the auto-detection of Dell Compellent arrays on a port. Syntax iscsi profile-compellent Defaults Dell Compellent disk arrays are not detected.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands. When you use the no iscsi target port command and the TCP port you wish to delete is one bound to a specific IP address, the IP address value must be included in the command.
Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] Related Commands mac learning-limit — allows aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow station move on learned MACs. show interfaces — displays information on the interfaces.
flowcontrol Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 10G and 40Gig stack units. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Command History Usage Information flowcontrol rx {off | on} tx {off | on} threshold rx on Enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. This is the default value for the receive side. rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port.
On 4–port 10G stack units: Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output for 10G interfaces. This is because 10G interfaces do not support auto-negotiation. Important Points to Remember • Do not enable tx pause when buffer carving is enabled. For information and assistance, consult Dell Networking TAC. • Asymmetric flow control (rx on tx off, or rx off tx on) setting for the interface port less than 100 Mb/s speed is not permitted.
off on on Related Commands on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on show running-config — displays the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only). show interfaces — displays the negotiated flow control parameters.
Version 8.3.16.1 Usage Information Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You cannot delete a physical interface. By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface in mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the Port Channel Commands command. The tunnel interface operates as an ECMP (equal cost multi path) only when the next hop to the tunnel destination is over a physical interface.
interface range This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are applied (bulk configuration). Using the interface range command, you can enter identical commands for a range of interface. Syntax Parameters interface range interface, interface,... interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface range and one of the interfaces — slot/port, port-channel, or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
characters. If the bulk configuration exceeds 32 characters, it is represented by an ellipsis ( ... ). • When the interface range prompt has multiple port ranges, the smaller port range is excluded from the prompt. • If overlapping port ranges are specified, the port range is extended to the smallest start port and the biggest end port.
Vlan 2–100, Port 1–25 Dell(config-if-range)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range)# Related Commands interface port-channel — configures a port channel group. interface vlan — configures a VLAN interface. show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) — shows the bulk configuration interfaces. show range — shows the bulk configuration ranges. interface vlan Configure a VLAN. You can configure up to 4096 VLANs. Syntax interface vlan vlan-id To delete a VLAN, use the no interface vlan vlan-id command.
intf-type cr4 autoneg Set the interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled. Syntax intf-type cr4 autoneg If you configure intf-type cr4 autoneg, use the no intf-type cr4 autoneg command to set the interface type as cr4 with autonegotiation disabled. Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.
Usage Information When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the system does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the remote end is down. mtu Set the link maximum transmission unit (MTU) (frame size) for an Ethernet interface. Syntax mtu value To return to the default MTU value, use the no mtu command.
contains tagged members with Link MTU of 1522 and IP MTU of 1500 and untagged members with Link MTU of 1518 and IP MTU of 1500. The VLAN’s Link MTU cannot be higher than 1518 bytes and its IP MTU cannot be higher than 1500 bytes. The following shows the difference between Link MTU and IP MTU.
• Slave • Auto-neg Error — typically indicates that both ends of the node are configured with forced-master or forced-slave. CAUTION: Ensure that one end of your node is configured as forced-master and one is configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is, forced-master or forced-slave), the show interfaces command flaps between an auto-neg-error and forced-master/slave states. You can display master/slave settings with the show interfaces command.
• auto-negotiation enabled* speed 1000 or auto • auto-negotiation enabled speed 100 • auto-negotiation disabled speed 100 • auto-negotiation enabled speed 100 • auto-negotiation disabled speed 100 Link Status Between Port 1 and Port 2 • Up at 1000 Mb/s • Up at 100 Mb/s • Up at 100 Mb/s • Down • Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto.
• True — port is tagged • False — port is untagged • Hybrid — port accepts both tagged and untagged frames The following describes the interface vlan command shown in the following example. This example shows unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid command. NOTE: Remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the hybrid configuration from the port.
Dell(conf-if-te-0/20)#no portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-vl-20)# Related Commands show interfaces switchport — displays the configuration of switchport (Layer 2) interfaces on the switch. vlan-stack trunk — specifies an interface as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network. stack-unit portmode Split a single 40G port into 4-10G ports on the MXL switch. Syntax Parameters stack-unit stack-unit port number portmode quad stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset.
The system must be reloaded after issuing the CLI for the change to take effect. Port Channel Commands A link aggregation group (LAG) is a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link according to IEEE 802.3ad. In the Dell Networking OS, a LAG is referred to as a Port Channel. • For the MXL switch, the maximum port channel ID is 128 and the maximum members per port channel is 16.
You cannot add an interface to a Port Channel if the interface contains an IP address in its configuration. Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels are: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members.
Parameters channelnumber Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status, the LAG must have at least that number of “oper up” links before it can be declared as up.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.
Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. E-Series legacy command.
Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. E-Series legacy command. ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-max-resp-time command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time. The range is from 1 to 25. The default is 10 seconds.
ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3. Syntax Parameters ip igmp version {2 | 3} 2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2. 3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3. Defaults 2 (that is, IGMPv2) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
• • IGMP snooping is not supported on a default VLAN interface. IGMP snooping is not supported over VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN interfaces (you must disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface before configuring VLAN-Stack-related commands). ip igmp snooping enable Enable IGMP snooping on all or a single VLAN. This command is the master on/off switch to enable IGMP snooping. Syntax ip igmp snooping enable To disable IGMP snooping, use the no ip igmp snooping enable command.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.
Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mac-address-table static Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and virtual local area networks (VLANs).
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. For details about using this command, refer to the “NIC Teaming” section of the Layer 2 chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority. Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priorityvalue command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority.
Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. LACP Modes Mode Function active An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other ports by initiating LACP packets.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
Parameters systemcapabilities Enter the keywords system-capabilities to advertise the system capabilities TLVs to the LLDP peer. systemdescription Enter the keywords system-description to advertise the system description TLVs to the LLDP peer. system-name Enter the keywords system-name to advertise the system name TLVs to the LLDP peer. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
clear lldp neighbors Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interface. Syntax Parameters clear lldp neighbors {interface} interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Version 9.
packet (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets coming in or going out. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information. tx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tx to display transmit-only packet information. rx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rx to display receive-only packet information.
hello Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer. Syntax hello seconds To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command. Parameters seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking operating software commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Networking Products. Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis. dot1p-priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic this interface receives.
When you set the priority for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are configured with the same value. You cannot assign the dot1ppriority command to individual interfaces in a port channel. service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry.
assigned to the port channel are automatically configured; you cannot assign the service-class dynamic command to individual interfaces in a port channel. • All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command on an interface or globally. • Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supersede dot1p service classes. service-class dot1p-mapping Configure a service-class criterion based on a dot1p value.
Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information To apply dot1p-queue-mapping, use the service-class dynamic dot1p command. Related Commands service-class dot1p-mapping — displays the dot1p priority to queue mapping on the switch. service-class bandwidth-percentage Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues.
Policy-Based QoS Commands Policy-based traffic classification is handled with class maps. These maps classify unicast traffic into one of four classes. The system allows you to match multiple class maps and specify multiple match criteria. Policy-based QoS is not supported on logical interfaces, such as port-channels, VLANs, or Loopbacks. bandwidth-percentage Assign a percentage of weight to the class/queue.
Command Modes Command History Related Commands CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output; conf-qos-policy-in and conf-qos-policy-out; wred) Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. policy-map-output — creates an output policy map. qos-policy-output — creates an output QoS-policy on the router.
Related Commands policy-map-output — creates an output policy map. policy-map-output Create an output policy map. Syntax policy-map-output policy-map-name To remove a policy map, use the no policy-map-output policy-map-name command. Parameters policy-mapname Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes Command History CONFIGURATION Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To specify the name of the output QoS policy, use this command. After the output policy is specified, rate-limit, bandwidth-percentage, and WRED can be defined. This command enables Qos-Policy-Output Configuration mode — (conf-qospolicy-out). Related Commands bandwidth-percentage — assigns weight to the class/queue percentage.
To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command. Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 3 (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control traffic). class-map class-mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword class-map then the class map name assigned to the queue in character format (32 character maximum). NOTE: This option is available under policy-mapinput only.
Command History Example Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qmap_out Bandwidth-percentage 10 Qos-policy-output qmap_wg Rate-shape 100 50 Wred yellow wy Wred green wg Dell# Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core.
Parameters ipv4–address Enter the IPv4 address of the backup destination. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 then an IPv6 address in the X:X:X:X::X format. interval seconds Enter the keyword interval to specify the time interval to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. The default is 1 second. Defaults 1 second Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.2(0.2) Added multicast and ndp parameters. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 9.0.0.
Usage Information Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.0 Added port-channel parameter on the S4810. Version 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. LACP on the VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the virtual link trunk, is not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.19.
--------- ------------ ----------- 100 -- Vlan IPV4 Multicast Status -------------------------Vlan-ID Local Status ------------------4094 L3 Peer Status ----------- Active Inactive Dell# system-mac Reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain. Syntax Parameters system-mac mac-address mac-address Enter the system MAC address for the VLT domain. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters 0|1 Configure the default unit ID of a VLT peer switch. Enter 0 for the first peer or enter 1 for the second peer. Defaults Automatically assigned based on the MAC address of each VLT peer. The peer with the lower MAC address is assigned unit 0; the peer with the higher MAC address is assigned unit 1. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information The VLT domain ID must be the same between the two VLT devices. If the domain ID is not the same, a syslog message is generated and VLT does not launch.
reload-type Configure a switch to reload as a DHCP client in BMP mode with all ports configured for Layer 3 traffic or in Normal mode. Syntax reload-type [bmp | normal—reload {[auto—save {enable | disable}] | [config-scr-download {enable | disable}] | [dhcptimeout minutes]| retry-count number | vendor-class-identifier description] Use the disable bmp command to stop the BMP process. Parameters bmp (Default) Enable the BMP reload type.
NOTE: This parameter replaces the deprecated parameter userdefined-string. Defaults BMP Switches running BMP reload in BMP mode as a DHCP client with all ports configured for Layer 3 traffic. Command Modes Command History Usage Information GLOBAL CONFIGURATION Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.2(0.
upgrades. To reload the switch in the last configured mode: Normal reload or BMP mode, you can enter the reload command at any time. Upgrade any configuration changes that have changed the NVRAM content by performing a reload on the chassis. While BMP is on, the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide prompt changes to “Dell-BMP”.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Related Commands Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. clear ufd-disable — re-enables downstream interfaces that are in a UFD-Disabled Error state. description Enter a text description of an uplink-state group. Syntax Parameters description text text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters interface Enter one of the following interface types: • Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/ port-range} • 1 Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range} • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/ port |slot/port-range} • Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | portchannel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9
Related Commands • upstream— assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream auto-recover Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in an uplink-state group automatically come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up.
Parameters number Enter the number of downstream links to be brought down by UFD. The range is from 1 to 1024. all Brings down all downstream links in the group. Defaults No downstream links are disabled when an upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Related Commands Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Version 8.4.2.3 Example Related Commands Introduced on the S-Series S50. Dell#show running-config uplink-state-group ! no enable uplink state track 1 downstream GigabitEthernet 0/2,4,6,11-19 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/48, 52 upstream PortChannel 1 ! uplink state track 2 downstream GigabitEthernet 0/1,3,5,7-10 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/56,60 • show uplink-state-group — displays the status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
Example Dell# show uplink-state-group Uplink State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group: 5 Status: Enabled, Down Uplink State Group: 6 Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group: 7 Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up Dell# show uplink-state-group 16 Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up Dell#show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 1 Status: Enable
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.12.
Parameters interface Enter one of the following interface types: • Fast Ethernet: fastethernet {slot/port | slot/ port-range} • 1 Gigabit Ethernet: gigabitethernet {slot/port | slot/port-range} • 10 Gigabit Ethernet: tengigabitethernet {slot/ port | slot/port-range} • 40 Gigabit Ethernet: fortyGigE {slot/port | slot/ port-range} • Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | portchannel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports
Example Related Commands Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# upstream gigabitethernet 1/10-15 Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# • downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog.
snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps. Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notificationoption] To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notificationtype] [notification-option] command. Parameters notificationtype notificationoption Enter the type of notification from the following list: • bgp — Notification of changes in the BGP process. • config — Notification of changes to the startup or running configuration. • ecfm — Notification of changes to ECFM.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.1(0.0) Added support for copy-config and ecmp traps. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
traps (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword traps to send trap notifications to the specified host. The default is traps. informs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword informs to send inform notifications to the specified host. The default is traps. version 1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version to specify the security model then the security model version number 1, 2c, or 3: • Version 1 is the least secure version. • Version 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
• isis — Enable ISIS adjacency change traps • pfc — Enable pfc traps • snmp — Enable SNMP trap • stp — Enable 802.1d state change traps • vlt — Enable VLT traps • vrrp — Enable VRRP state change traps • xstp — Enable 802.1s, 802.1w, and PVST+ state change traps The default is all trap types are sent to host. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
previous command. Only the last snmp-server host command will be in effect. For example, if you enter an snmp-server host inform command for a host and then enter another snmp-server host inform command for the same host, the second command replaces the first command. The snmp-server host command is used with the snmp-server enable command. Use the snmp-server enable command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally.
Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands show logging — displays logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer. logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent.
Version 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Multiple logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6 can be configured. Related Commands logging trap — enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity. logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer.
Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you decrease the buffer size, all messages stored in the buffer are lost. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages stored in the buffer. Related Commands clear logging — clears the logging buffer.
Version 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands clear logging — clears the logging buffer. show logging — displays the logging setting and system messages in the internal buffer. logging monitor Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications. Syntax logging monitor [level] To disable logging to terminal connections, use the no logging monitor command.
logging source-interface Specify that the IP address of an interface is the source IP address of Syslog packets sent to the Syslog server. Syntax logging source-interface interface To disable this command and return to the default setting, use the no logging source-interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Syslog messages contain the IP address of the interface used to egress the router. By configuring the logging source-interface command, the Syslog packets contain the IP address of the interface configured. Related Commands logging— enables logging to the Syslog server.
Version 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Version 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Example (Partial) Dell#show logging Syslog logging: enabled Console logging: level debugging Monitor logging: level debugging Buffer logging: level debugging, 5604 Messages Logged, Size (524288 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Oct 8 09:25:37: %RPM1:RP1 %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Connection with neighbor 223.80.255.254 closed.
%RPM:0:0 %CHMGR-2-LINECARDDOWN - Line card 3 down - IPC timeout Dell# show logging driverlog stack-unit Display the driver log for the specified stack member. Syntax Parameters show logging driverlog stack-unit unit# stack-unit unit# Enter the keywords stack-unit followed by the stack member ID of the switch for which you want to display the driver log. The range is from 0 to 7. defaults none Command Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Version 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Version 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
